MICROMASTER 420

Parameter List Issue 10/06

User Documentation
6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Available Documentation for the MICROMASTER 420
Getting Started Guide
Is for quick commissioning with SDP and BOP.

Operating Instructions
Gives information about features of the MICROMASTER
420, Installation, Commissioning, Control modes, System
Parameter structure, Troubleshooting, Specifications and
available options of the MICROMASTER 420.

Parameter List
The Parameter List contains the description of all
Parameters structured in functional order and a detailed
description. The Parameter list also includes a series of
function plans.

Catalogues
In the catalogue you will find all needs to select a certain
inverter, as well as filters chokes, operator panels or
communications options.
 SINAMICS
s SIMATIC
MICROMASTER
Product Information Edition 08/2013

English
Changes to the motor thermal protection feature of the MICROMASTER, SIMATIC &
SINAMICS inverters

On 9th November 2010 Underwriters Laboratories Inc.(UL) revised the standard for “safety of power
conversion equipment” which covers Siemens inverters. These changes in the standard become effective
from the 9th of May 2013.
The changes relate to the performance of the software motor protection offered by the inverter, in that
when the inverter is power-cycled it must now retain the motor temperature data for use when power is
reapplied.
The following products have had a software update to comply with the new requirements.
• MICROMASTER 420 software V1.3 or above. (Order No. 6SE6420…..…)
• MICROMASTER 430 software V2.2 or above. (Order No. 6SE6430…….)
• MICROMASTER 440 software V2.2 or above. (Order No. 6SE6440…….)
• SINAMICS G110 software V1.2 or above. (Order No. 6SL3211……..)
• SINAMICS G110D software V3.6 or above. (Order No. 6SL3511…..…)
• SINAMICS Pool CU-2 software V4.6 or above *)
(CU230P-2, CU240E-2, CU240B-2, G120C, CU240D-2, CU250D-2).
• SIMATIC ET200pro FC-2 software V4.7 or above *)
These products now, by default, store the motor temperature (r0034 for SINAMICS G110 and
MICROMASTER 420; r0035 for SINAMICS G110D and MICROMASTER 430/440) and re-use this value
when power is reapplied:
Parameter P0610 has been changed to reflect this new requirement as follows:
The default value of parameter P0610 is now 6 and the following settings have been added:
• Value 4 = Warning Only, no reaction, no trip, save temperature on power down.
• Value 5 = Warning, Imax reduction, trip F0011, save temperature on power down.
• Value 6 = Warning , no reaction, trip F0011, save temperature on power down.
*) Those units have other settings and default values. Please refer to the relevant parameter lists.
The following products will not have the software update to support the new requirements.
• All MICROMASTER 3 variants (Order No. 6SE32……..…)
• All MICROMASTER 410 (Order No. 6SE6410…..…)
• All MICROMASTER 411 (Order No. 6SE6411……..)
• All MICROMASTER 436 (Order No. 6SE6436….….)
• All MICROMASTER MMI / CM2 (Order No. 6SE96………..)
These products are unchanged from their original design, but this is no longer compliant with the new
requirements.
These products may still bear the UL symbol but it is now the end users responsibility to provide listed
motor overload protection external to the inverter.
We suggest the end user consider devices such as the Siemens overload relay 3RU series on the motor
side of the inverter in order to provide the motor protection, details of which can be found at the link
below:
http://www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-controls/en/protection-equipment/overload-
relays/pages/default.aspx

*A5E31674145A*
Deutsch
Änderung zum thermischen Motorschutz bei Frequenzumrichtern MICROMASTER, SIMATIC
und SINAMICS

Ab 9. November 2010 hat “Underwriters Laboratories Inc.(UL)” den Standard “Safety of power conversion
equipment” geändert. Davon sind auch Siemens-Frequenzumrichter betroffen. Die Änderung trat am 9.
Mai 2013 in Kraft.
Die Änderung bezieht sich auf die Leistungsfähigkeit der Software für den Motorschutz, den der
Frequenzumrichter bietet. Wenn bei dem Frequenzumrichter ein “Power-Cycle” durchgeführt wird, muss
der Wert der Motortemperatur beim Wiedereinschalten beibehalten werden.
Folgende Produkte erfüllen die neue Anforderung zum thermischen Motorschutz:
• MICROMASTER 420, ab Software V1.3 (Bestell- Nr. 6SE6420…..…)
• MICROMASTER 430, ab Software V2.2 (Bestell- Nr. 6SE6430…….)
• MICROMASTER 440, Software V2.2. (Bestell- Nr. 6SE6440…….)
• SINAMICS G110, ab Software V1.2 (Bestell- Nr. 6SL3211……..)
• SINAMICS G110D , ab Software v3.6 (Bestell- Nr. 6SL3511…..…)
• SINAMICS Pool CU-2 , ab Software V4.6 *)
(CU230P-2, CU240E-2, CU240B-2, G120C, CU240D-2, CU250D-2).
• SIMATIC ET200pro FC-2 , ab Software V4.7 *)
Dabei wird in der Werkseinstellung die Motortemperatur gespeichert (r0034 für SINAMICS G110 und
MICROMASTER 420; r0035 für SINAMICS G110D und MICROMASTER 430/440) und beim Zuschalten
der Spannung, also nach einem Power Cycle, für die Berechnung der Motortemperatur verwendet.
Die Änderung wird über folgende Erweiterung des Parameters P0610 realisiert.
Neue Einstellmöglichkeiten:
• Wert 4 = nur Warnung, keine Reaktion, Temperaturwert beim Ausschalten speichern.
• Wert 5 = Warnung, Imax reduzieren, Abschaltung mit F0011, Temperaturwert beim Ausschalten
speichern.
• Wert 6 = Warnung , keine Reaktion, Abschaltung mit F0011, Temperaturwert beim Ausschalten
speichern (neue Werkseinstellung)
*) Bei diesen Geräten gibt es andere Einstellmöglichkeiten und Werkseinstellungen. Beachten Sie die
entsprechenden Listenhandbücher!

Die folgenden Produkte erfüllen die neue Anforderung zum thermischen Motorschutz nicht:
• Alle MICROMASTER 3 Varianten (Bestell- Nr. 6SE32……..…)
• Alle MICROMASTER 410 (Bestell- Nr. 6SE6410……..)
• Alle MICROMASTER 411 (Bestell- Nr. 6SE6411……..)
• Alle MICROMASTER 436 (Bestell- Nr. 6SE6436….….)
• Alle MICROMASTER MMI / CM2 (Bestell- Nr. 6SE96…….…..)
Am Original Design dieser Produkte hat sich nichts geändert, aber sie erfüllen nicht mehr die neuen UL
Vorschriften.
Diese Produkte dürfen am Typenschild ein UL Symbol zeigen, aber es ist in der Verantwortung des
Endkunden einen gelisteten externen Motorüberlastschutz einzubauen.
Wir empfehlen dem Endkunden ein Siemens-Überlastrelais der Serie 3RU motorseitig am
Frequenzumrichter zu installieren, um den Motorschutz zu gewährleisten.
Weitere Informationen zu den Sirius 3RU-Überlastrelais finden Sie unter folgendem Link:
http://www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-
controls/de/schutzgeraete/ueberlastrelais/Seiten/default.aspx

*A5E31674145A*
2 SINAMICS, SIMATIC and MICROMASTER inverters
Product Information, A5E31674145A, Edition 08/2013
Français
Changement de la fonction de protection thermique du moteur des variateurs de vitesse
MICROMASTER & SINAMICS

Le 09 Novembre 2010 Underwriters Laboratories Inc.(UL) ont révisé les standards sur la “sécurité des
convertisseurs de puissance” (“safety of power conversion equipment”) qui s’appliquent aux variateurs de
vitesse Siemens . Ces changements des standards sont effectifs à partir du 09 Mai 2013.
Les changements se rapportent à la performance de la fonction protection thermique du moteur des
variateurs de vitesse, en ceci que lorsque le variateur de vitesse est mis hors tension, les données
thermiques du moteur doivent désormais être conservées jusqu'à la prochaine mise sous tension et
utilisation du produit.
Une mise à jour du software sur les produits suivants a été implémentée afin de se conformer aux
nouveaux standards.
• MICROMASTER 420 software V1.3 ou supérieur (Order No. 6SE6420…..…)
• MICROMASTER 430 software V2.2 ou supérieur (Order No. 6SE6430…….)
• MICROMASTER 440 software V2.2 ou supérieur (Order No. 6SE6440…….)
• SINAMICS G110 software V1.12 ou supérieur (Order No. 6SL3211……..)
• SINAMICS G110D software V1.3 ou supérieur (Order No. 6SL3511…..…)
• SINAMICS Pool CU-2 software V4.6 ou supérieur *)
(CU230P-2, CU240E-2, CU240B-2, G120C, CU240D-2, CU250D-2).
• SIMATIC ET200pro FC-2 software V4.7 ou supérieur *)
Désormais, les produits enregistrent par défaut la température du moteur (r0034 pour SINAMICS G110 et
MICROMASTER 420 ; r0035 pour SINAMICS G110D et MICROMASTER 430/440) et réutilisent cette
valeur dès que la puissance est rétablie sur l’équipement.
Le paramètre P0610 a été modifié afin de refléter ces changements, comme indiqué ci-dessous :
La valeur par défaut du paramètre P0610 est désormais 6, et les réglages suivants ont été ajoutés :
• Value 4 = Avertissement uniquement, température enregistrée lors de la mise hors tension.
• Value 5 = Avertissement et réduction Imax, arrêt F0011, température enregistrée lors de la mise
hors tension.
• Value 6 = Avertissement, pas réaction, arrêt F0011, température enregistrée lors de la mise hors
tension.
*) Ces appareils ont d’autres possibilités de réglage et d’autres réglages usine. Tenir compte des tables
de paramètres !
Les versions de software des produits suivants n’intègrent pas les modifications pour répondre aux
nouveaux standards UL.
• tous les MICROMASTER 3 variants (N° de réf. 6SE32………..)
• tous les MICROMASTER 410 (N° de réf. 6SE6410…..…)
• tous les MICROMASTER 411 (N° de réf. 6SE6411……..)
• tous les MICROMASTER 436 (N° de réf. 6SE6436….….)
• tous les MICROMASTER MMI / CM2 (N° de réf. 6SE96………..)
Ces produits restent inchangés de leur conception d’origine et ne sont pas conforme à ce nouveau
standards UL.
Bien que ces produits aient toujours le marquage UL, les utilisateurs finaux sont maintenant responsables
de la mise en place sur le variateur d’équipement externe de protection thermique moteur listés.
Nous recommandons aux utilisateurs externes d’utiliser des relais de protection thermique côté moteur
de type Siemens Sirius 3RU.
Plus d’informations sur ces relais sont disponibles sous le lien suivant :
http://www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-controls/en/protection-equipment/overload-
relays/pages/default.aspx

*A5E31674145A*
SINAMICS, SIMATIC and MICROMASTER inverters 3
Product Information, A5E31674145A, Edition 08/2013
Italiano
Modifiche della funzione di protezione termica del motore dei convertitori di frequenza
MICROMASTER, SIMATIC e SINAMICS

In data 9 novembre 2010 Underwriters Laboratories Inc.(UL) ha rivisto lo standard per la "sicurezza delle
apparecchiature di conversione di potenza" (safety of power conversion equipment) che si applica ai
convertitori di frequenza Siemens. Queste modifiche della norma sono entrate in vigore il 9 maggio 2013.
Le variazioni riguardano le caratteristiche della protezione software del motore offerte dal convertitore di
frequenza: quando quest'ultimo viene spento e riacceso deve ora memorizzare i dati termici del motore
per riutilizzarli al momento della riaccensione.
I prodotti seguenti hanno implementato un aggiornamento del software per conformarsi ai nuovi requisiti
normativi.
• MICROMASTER 420 software V1.3 o successiva. (n. di ordinazione 6SE6420…..…)
• MICROMASTER 430 software V2.2 o successiva. (n. di ordinazione 6SE6430…….)
• MICROMASTER 440 software V2.2 o successiva. (n. di ordinazione 6SE6440…….)
• SINAMICS G110 software V1.2 o successiva. (n. di ordinazione 6SL3211……..)
• SINAMICS G110D software V3.6 o successiva. (n. di ordinazione 6SL3511…..…)
• SINAMICS Pool CU-2 software V4.6 o successiva *)
(CU230P-2, CU240E-2, CU240B-2, G120C, CU240D-2, CU250D-2).
• SIMATIC ET200pro FC-2 software V4.7 o successiva *)
Tali prodotti memorizzano adesso sistematicamente la temperatura del motore (r0034 per SINAMICS
G110 e MICROMASTER 420; r0035 per SINAMICS G110D e MICROMASTER 430/440) e riutilizzano
questo valore alla riaccensione:
Il parametro P0610 è stato modificato come segue per tenere conto di questo nuovo requisito:
Il valore predefinito del parametro P0610 è diventato 6 e sono state aggiunte le seguenti impostazioni:
• Valore 4 = solo avviso, nessuna reazione, nessuna disinserzione, memorizzazione della
temperatura allo spegnimento.
• Valore 5 = solo avviso, riduzione Imax, disinserzione F0011, memorizzazione della temperatura
allo spegnimento.
• Valore 6 = solo avviso, nessuna reazione, disinserzione F0011, memorizzazione della
temperatura allo spegnimento.
*) Queste unità presentano impostazioni e valori predefinti differenti. Fare riferimento alla lista parametri
corrispondente.
I prodotti seguenti non implementeranno l'aggiornamento software e di conseguenza non supporteranno i
nuovi requisiti.
• Tutte le varianti MICROMASTER 3 (n. di ordinazione 6SE32……..…)
• Tutti i MICROMASTER 410 (n. di ordinazione 6SE6410…..…)
• Tutti i MICROMASTER 411 (n. di ordinazione 6SE6411……..)
• Tutti i MICROMASTER 436 (n. di ordinazione 6SE6436….….)
• Tutti i MICROMASTER MMI / CM2 (n. di ordinazione 6SE96………..)
Questi prodotti restano invariati rispetto alla loro progettazione originale, ma non sono più compatibili con
i nuovi requisiti.
Questi prodotti possono mantenere il simbolo UL, ma compete all'utente finale assicurare la protezione
esterna contro i sovraccarichi del motore richiesta dalla norma per il convertitore di frequenza.
Per assicurare la protezione del motore si consiglia all'utente finale di ricorrere a dispositivi come i relè di
sovraccarico Siemens della serie 3RU sul lato motore del convertitore di frequenza. Per i dettagli fare
riferimento al link seguente:
http://www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-controls/en/protection-equipment/overload-
relays/pages/default.aspx

*A5E31674145A*
4 SINAMICS, SIMATIC and MICROMASTER inverters
Product Information, A5E31674145A, Edition 08/2013
Español

Cambios en la función de protección térmica del motor de los convertidores

MICROMASTER, SIMATIC y SINAMICS

El 9 de noviembre de 2010, Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) revisó el estándar de "seguridad de los
equipos convertidores de energía", que afecta a los convertidores de Siemens. Estos cambios en el
estándar entraron en vigor el 9 de mayo de 2013.
Los cambios están relacionados con el rendimiento de la protección del motor por software ofrecida por
el convertidor, por la cual, cuando el convertidor se apaga y se vuelve a encender, debe conservar los
datos sobre la temperatura del motor para utilizarlos al volver a arrancar.
Para cumplir con los nuevos requisitos, se ha actualizado el software de los productos siguientes.
• Software MICROMASTER 420 V1.3 o superior. (Ref. 6SE6420…..…)
• Software MICROMASTER 430 V2.2 o superior. (Ref. 6SE6430…….)
• Software MICROMASTER 440 V2.2 o superior. (Ref. 6SE6440…….)
• Software SINAMICS G110 V1.2 o superior. (Ref. 6SL3211……..)
• Software SINAMICS G110D V3.6 o superior. (Ref. 6SL3511…..…)
• Software SINAMICS Pool CU-2 V4.6 o superior *)
(CU230P-2, CU240E-2, CU240B-2, G120C, CU240D-2, CU250D-2).
• Software SIMATIC ET200pro FC-2 V4.7 o superior. *)
De forma predeterminada, estos productos almacenan la temperatura del motor (r0034 para SINAMICS
G110 y MICROMASTER 420; r0035 para SINAMICS G110D y MICROMASTER 430/440) y reutilizan ese
valor al volver a arrancar:
El parámetro P0610 se ha modificado para reflejar este nuevo requisito de la forma siguiente:
El valor predeterminado del parámetro P0610 ahora es 6, y se han añadido los siguientes ajustes:
• Valor 4 = Solo aviso, sin reacción, sin disparo, guardar temperatura al apagar.
• Valor 5 = Aviso, reducción Imáx, disparo F0011, guardar temperatura al apagar.
• Valor 6 = Aviso, sin reacción, disparo F0011, guardar temperatura al apagar.
*) Estas unidades tienen otros ajustes y valores predeterminados. Consulte las listas de parámetros
pertinentes.
Los productos siguientes no dispondrán de la actualización de software para cumplir los nuevos
requisitos.
• Todas las variantes de MICROMASTER 3 (Ref. 6SE32……..…)
• Todos los MICROMASTER 410 (Ref. 6SE6410…..…)
• Todos los MICROMASTER 411 (Ref. 6SE6411……..)
• Todos los MICROMASTER 436 (Ref. 6SE6436….….)
• Todos los MICROMASTER MMI/CM2 (Ref. 6SE96………..)
Estos productos no han sufrido cambios respecto a su diseño original, pero ya no cumplen los nuevos
requisitos.
Estos productos todavía pueden llevar el símbolo UL, pero ahora es responsabilidad de los usuarios
finales proporcionar una protección homologada contra sobrecarga del motor externa al convertidor.
Para la protección del motor, recomendamos al usuario final dispositivos como el relé de sobrecarga de
la serie 3RU de Siemens en el lado del motor del convertidor. Puede encontrar información detallada en
el enlace siguiente:
http://www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-controls/en/protection-equipment/overload-
relays/pages/default.aspx

*A5E31674145A*

SINAMICS, SIMATIC and MICROMASTER inverters 5

Product Information, A5E31674145A, Edition 08/2013
 Block Diagram and
Terminals

Parameter List
MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

Parameter List
User Documentation Faults and Alarms

Abbreviations

Valid for Issue 10/06

Inverter Type Software Version

MICROMASTER 420 V1.2

Issue 10/06
 Parameters MICROMASTER Issue 10/06

Warning
! Please refer to all Definitions and Warnings contained in the Operating Instructions.
You will find the Operating Instructions on the Docu CD delivered with your inverter. If
the CD is lost, it can be ordered via your local Siemens department under the Order
No. 6SE6400-5AB00-1AP0.

Information about MICROMASTER 420 is also available from:

Regional Contacts
Please get in touch with your contact for Technical Support in your Region for questions
about services, prices and conditions of Technical Support.

Central Technical Support

The competent consulting service for technical issues with a broad range of requirements-
based services around our products and systems.
Europe / Africa
Tel: +49 (0) 180 5050 222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050 223
Email: adsupport@siemens.com

America
Tel: +1 423 262 2522
Fax: +1 423 262 2589
Email: simatic.hotline@sea.siemens.com

Asia / Pacific
Tel: +86 1064 757 575
Fax: +86 1064 747 474
Email: adsupport.asia@siemens.com

Online Service & Support

The comprehensive, generally available information system over the Internet, from product
support to service & support to the support tools in the shop.
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

Internet Address
Customers can access technical and general information under the following address:
http://www.siemens.com/micromaster

Approved Siemens Quality for Software and Training Other functions not described in this document may be
is to DIN ISO 9001, Reg. No. 2160-01 available. However, this fact shall not constitute an obligation
to supply such functions with a new control, or when
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document, or its servicing.
contents is not permitted unless authorized in writing. We have checked that the contents of this document
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights including rights correspond to the hardware and software described. There
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or may be discrepancies nevertheless, and no guarantee can be
design are reserved. given that they are completely identical. The information
contained in this document is reviewed regularly and any
© Siemens AG 2001, 2002, 2004. All Rights Reserved. necessary changes will be included in the next edition. We
welcome suggestions for improvement.
MICROMASTER® is a registered trademark of Siemens
Siemens handbooks are printed on chlorine-free paper that
has been produced from managed sustainable forests. No
solvents have been used in the printing or binding process.
Document subject to change without prior notice.

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany Siemens-Aktiengesellschaft.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

4 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameters MICROMASTER

Parameters MICROMASTER 420

This Parameter List must only be used together with the Operating Instructions of the
MICROMASTER 420. Please pay special attention to the Warnings, Cautions, Notices
and Notes contained in these manuals.

Table of Contents
1 Block Diagram and Terminals ....................................................................7
1.1 Block Diagram ............................................................................................7
1.2 Power Terminals ........................................................................................8
1.3 Control Terminals .......................................................................................8

2 Parameters.................................................................................................9
2.1 Introduction to MICROMASTER System Parameters................................9
2.2 Quick commissioning (P0010 = 1) ...........................................................12
2.3 Binector Input Parameters........................................................................14
2.4 Connector Input Parameters ....................................................................14
2.5 Binector Output Parameters.....................................................................14
2.6 Connector Output Parameters .................................................................15
2.7 Connector/Binector Output Parameters ...................................................15

3 Parameter Description..............................................................................16
3.1 Common parameters................................................................................16
3.2 Diagnosis parameters ..............................................................................20
3.3 Inverter parameters (HW).........................................................................28
3.4 Motor parameters .....................................................................................33
3.5 Command source .....................................................................................44
3.6 Digital inputs.............................................................................................46
3.7 Digital outputs...........................................................................................51
3.8 Analog inputs............................................................................................53
3.9 Analog outputs .........................................................................................58
3.10 BICO command parameters.....................................................................61
3.11 Communication parameters .....................................................................65
3.12 Setpoint source ........................................................................................70
3.13 Fixed frequencies .....................................................................................72
3.14 Motorized potentiometer (MOP)...............................................................75
3.15 JOG ..........................................................................................................77
3.16 Setpoint channel.......................................................................................79
3.17 Ramp-function generator..........................................................................84
3.18 Flying restart.............................................................................................88
3.19 Automatic restart ......................................................................................90
3.20 Motor holding brake..................................................................................92
3.21 DC braking ...............................................................................................94

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 5
Parameters MICROMASTER Issue 10/06

3.22 Compound braking ...................................................................................96

3.23 Vdc controller ...........................................................................................97
3.24 Control mode............................................................................................99
3.25 V/f control parameters ........................................................................... 100
3.25.1 Slip compensation ................................................................................. 105
3.25.2 Resonance damping ............................................................................. 106
3.25.3 Imax controller....................................................................................... 107
3.25.4 Soft starting ........................................................................................... 108
3.26 Inverter parameters (Modulator) ........................................................... 109
3.27 Motor data identification ........................................................................ 110
3.28 Reference parameters........................................................................... 111
3.29 Communication parameters (USS, CB) ................................................ 113
3.30 Faults, Alarms, Monitoring..................................................................... 125
3.31 Technology controller (PID controller)................................................... 132
3.32 Inverter parameters ............................................................................... 143

4 Function Diagrams ................................................................................ 145

5 Faults and Alarms ................................................................................. 179

5.1 Fault messages ..................................................................................... 179
5.2 Alarm Messages.................................................................................... 184

6 Abbreviations......................................................................................... 189

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Block Diagram and Terminals

1 Block Diagram and Terminals

1.1 Block Diagram

PE
1/3 AC 200 - 240 V
3 AC 380 - 480 V SI

PE L/L1, N/L2
+10 V or
1 L/L1, N/L2, L3
0V or
2 L1, L2, L3
≥ 4.7 kΩ ADC+
3 A/D BOP link
ADC-
4 RS232

External 24 V 150.00
Hz

I Fn

0 Jog P
DIN1 DIN1
BOP/AOP
5 5
DIN2 DIN2
6 6 ~
DIN3 DIN3
7 7 =
+

DC-link connection
_ 24 V PNP
Output +24 V
max. 100 mA
or
8 (isolated) DC+

NPN Output 0 V
max. 100 mA
9 9 (isolated) CPU DC−

RL1-B
30 V DC / 5 A (resistive)
250 V AC / 2 A (inductive) Relay 10RL1-C
11

DAC+ =
0 - 20 mA 12 D/A
max. 500 Ω DAC-
3~
13

Not
60 Hz
P+ used
50 Hz
14 RS485 COM link
1 2
N-
The analog input circuit can be DIP switch
alternatively configured to
15
provide an additional digital PE U,V,W
input (DIN4): CB
automatic
2 Option
DIN4 3
M
4

+ - 9

24 V

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 7
Block Diagram and Terminals Issue 10/06

1.2 Power Terminals

You can gain access to the mains and motor terminals by removing the front covers.

SDP (BOP/AOP) Push the terminal

release and remove cover down

Fig. 1-1 Removing Front Covers

L3

L2/N

L1/L

U V W

Fig. 1-2 Power Terminals

1.3 Control Terminals

Terminal Designation Function
1 - Output +10 V
2 - Output 0 V
3 ADC+ Analog input (+)
4 ADC- Analog input (-)
5 DIN1 Digital input 1
6 DIN2 Digital input 2
7 DIN3 Digital input 3
8 - Isolated output +24 V / max. 100 mA
9 - Isolated output 0 V / max. 100 mA
10 RL1-B Digital output / NO contact
11 RL1-C Digital output / Changeover contact
12 DAC+ Analog output (+)
13 DAC- Analog output (-)
14 P+ RS485 port
15 N- RS485 port

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

8 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameters

2 Parameters

2.1 Introduction to MICROMASTER System Parameters

The layout of the parameter description is as follows.
1 Par number 2 Parameter name 9 Min: 12 Level:
[index] 3 CStat: 5 Datatype 7 Unit: 10 Def:
4 P-Group: 6 active: 8 Quick Comm: 11 Max: 2
13 Description:

1. Parameter number
Indicates the relevant parameter number. The numbers used are 4-digit numbers
in the range 0000 to 9999. Numbers prefixed with an “r” indicate that the
parameter is a “read-only” parameter, which displays a particular value but cannot
be changed directly by specifying a different value via this parameter number (in
such cases, dashes “-“ are entered at the points “Unit”, “Min”, “Def” and “Max” in
the header of the parameter description.
All other parameters are prefixed with a “P”. The values of these parameters can
be changed directly in the range indicated by the “Min” and “Max” settings in the
header.
[index] indicates that the parameter is an indexed parameter and specifies the
number of indices available.
2. Parameter name
Indicates the name of the relevant parameter.
Certain parameter names include the following abbreviated prefixes: BI, BO, CI,
and CO followed by a colon.
These abbreviations have the following meanings:

BI =
P9999 Binector input, i.e. parameter selects the source of a binary
(0) signal

BO = r9999
Binector output, i.e. parameter connects as a binary signal

CI =
r9999 Connector input, i.e. parameter selects the source of an
(999:9)
analog signal
CO = r9999 [99] Connector output, i.e. parameter connects as an analog
signal
r9999
CO/BO = r9999
Connector/Binector output, i.e. parameter connects as an
analog signal and/or as a binary signal
To make use of BiCo you will need access to the full parameter list. At this level
many new parameter settings are possible, including BiCo functionality. BiCo
functionality is a different, more flexible way of setting and combining input and
output functions. It can be used in most cases in conjunction with the simple,
level 2 settings.
The BiCo system allows complex functions to be programmed. Boolean and
mathematical relationships can be set up between inputs (digital, analog, serial
etc.) and outputs (inverter current, frequency, analog output, relays, etc.).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 9
Parameters Issue 10/06

3. CStat
Commissioning status of the parameter. Three states are possible:
Commissioning C
Run U
Ready to run T
This indicates when the parameter can be changed. One, two or all three states
may be specified. If all three states are specified, this means that it is possible to
change this parameter setting in all three inverter states
4. P-Group
Indicates the functional group of the particular.
Note
Parameter P0004 (parameter filter) acts as a filter and focuses access to
parameters according to the functional group selected.
5. Datatype
The data types available are shown in the table below.
Notation Meaning
U16 16-bit unsigned
U32 32-bit unsigned
I16 16-bit integer
I32 32-bit integer
Float Floating point
6. Active
Indicates whether
♦ Immediately changes to the parameter values take effective immediately after
they have been entered, or
♦ Confirm the “P” button on the operator panel (BOP or AOP) must be
pressed before the changes take effect.
7. Unit
Indicates the unit of measure applicable to the parameter values
8. QuickComm
Indicates whether or not (Yes or No) a parameter can only be changed during
quick commissioning, i.e. when P0010 (parameter groups for commissioning) is
set to 1 (quick commissioning).
9. Min
Indicates the minimum value to which the parameter can be set.
10. Def
Indicates the default value, i.e. the value which applies if the user does not specify
a particular value for the parameter.
11. Max
Indicates the maximum value to which the parameter can be set.
12. Level
Indicates the level of user access. There are four access levels: Standard,
Extended, Expert and Service. Level 4 parameters are only for service purposes
and not visible with BOP/AOP. The number of parameters that appear in each
functional group depends on the access level set in P0003 (user access level).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

10 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameters

13. Description
The parameter description consists of the sections and contents listed below.
Some of these sections and contents are optional and will be omitted on a case-
to-case basis if not applicable.
Description: Brief explanation of the parameter function.
Diagram: Where applicable, diagram to illustrate the effects of parameters on a
characteristic curve, for example
Settings: List of applicable settings. These include
Possible settings, Most common settings, Index and Bitfields
Example: Optional example of the effects of a particular parameter setting.
Dependency: Any conditions that must be satisfied in connection with this parameter. Also
any particular effects, which this parameter has on other parameter(s) or which
other parameters have on this one.
Warning / Caution / Notice / Note:
Important information which must be heeded to prevent personal injury or
damage to equipment / specific information which should be heeded in order to
avoid problems / information which may be helpful to the user
More details: Any sources of more detailed information concerning the particular parameter.

Operators
The following operators are used in the parameter list to represent mathematical
interrelationships:
Arithmetic operators
+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
Comparison operators
> Greater than
>= Greater than / equal to
< Less than
<= Less than / equal to
Equivalence operators
== Equal to
!= Not equal to
Logical operators
&& AND logic operation
|| OR logic operation

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 11
Parameters Issue 10/06

2.2 Quick commissioning (P0010 = 1)

The following parameters are necessary for quick commissioning (P0010 = 1).

Quick commissioning (P0010 = 1)

Par.-No. Name Access level Cstat
P0100 Europe / North America 1 C
P0300 Select motor type 2 C
P0304 Motor voltage rating 1 C
P0305 Motor current rating 1 C
P0307 Motor power rating 1 C
P0308 Motor cosPhi rating 1 C
P0309 Motor efficiency rating 1 C
P0310 Motor frequency rating 1 C
P0311 Motor speed rating 1 C
P0320 Motor magnetizing current 3 CT
P0335 Motor cooling 2 CT
P0640 Motor overload factor [%] 2 CUT
P0700 Selection of command source 1 CT
P1000 Selection of frequency setpoint 1 CT
P1080 Min. frequency 1 CUT
P1082 Max. frequency 1 CT
P1120 Ramp-up time 1 CUT
P1121 Ramp-down time 1 CUT
P1135 OFF3 ramp-down time 2 CUT
P1300 Control mode 2 CT
P1910 Select motor data identification 2 CT
P3900 End of quick commissioning 1 C

When P0010 = 1 is chosen, P0003 (user access level) can be used to select the
parameters to be accessed. This parameter also allows selection of a user-defined
parameter list for quick commissioning.
At the end of the quick commissioning sequence, set P3900 = 1 to carry out the
necessary motor calculations and clear all other parameters (not included in P0010
= 1) to their default settings.

Note
This applies only in Quick Commissioning mode.

Reset to Factory default

To reset all parameters to the factory default settings; the following parameters should
be set as follows:
Set P0010 = 30
Set P0970 = 1

Note
The reset process takes approximately 10 seconds to complete.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

12 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameters

Seven-segment display
The seven-segment display is structured as follows:
Segment Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Segment Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

The significance of the relevant bits in the display is described in the status and
control word parameters.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 13
Parameters Issue 10/06

2.3 Binector Input Parameters

ParNo Parameter name ParNo Parameter name
P0731 BI: Function of digital output 1 P1074 BI: Disable additional setpoint
P0800 BI: Download parameter set 0 P1110 BI: Inhibit neg. freq. setpoint
P0801 BI: Download parameter set 1
P0810 BI: CDS bit 0 (Local / Remote) P1113 BI: Reverse
P0840 BI: ON/OFF1 P1124 BI: Enable JOG ramp times
P1140 BI: RFG enable
P0842 BI: ON reverse/OFF1 P1141 BI: RFG start
P0844 BI: 1. OFF2 P1142 BI: RFG enable setpoint
P0845 BI: 2. OFF2
P0848 BI: 1. OFF3 P1230 BI: Enable DC braking
P0849 BI: 2. OFF3 P2103 BI: 1. Faults acknowledgement
P2104 BI: 2. Faults acknowledgement
P0852 BI: Pulse enable P2106 BI: External fault
P1020 BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 0 P2200 BI: Enable PID controller
P1021 BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 1
P1022 BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 2 P2220 BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 0
P1035 BI: Enable MOP (UP-command) P2221 BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 1
P2222 BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 2
P1036 BI: Enable MOP (DOWN-command) P2235 BI: Enable PID-MOP (UP-cmd)
P1055 BI: Enable JOG right P2236 BI: Enable PID-MOP (DOWN-cmd)
P1056 BI: Enable JOG left

2.4 Connector Input Parameters

ParNo Parameter name ParNo Parameter name
P0771 CI: DAC P2019[4] CI: PZD to COM link (USS)
P1070 CI: Main setpoint P2051[4] CI: PZD to CB
P1071 CI: Main setpoint scaling P2253 CI: PID setpoint
P1075 CI: Additional setpoint P2254 CI: PID trim source
P1076 CI: Additional setpoint scaling
P2264 CI: PID feedback
P2016[4] CI: PZD to BOP link (USS)

2.5 Binector Output Parameters

ParNo Parameter name ParNo Parameter name
r2032 BO: CtrlWrd1 from BOP link (USS) r2037 BO: CtrlWrd2 from COM link (USS)
r2033 BO: CtrlWrd2 from BOP link (USS) r2090 BO: Control word 1 from CB
r2036 BO: CtrlWrd1 from COM link (USS) r2091 BO: Control word 2 from CB

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

14 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameters

2.6 Connector Output Parameters

ParNo Parameter name ParNo Parameter name
r0020 CO: Freq. setpoint before RFG r1079 CO: Selected frequency setpoint
r0021 CO: Act. frequency r1114 CO: Freq. setp. after dir. ctrl.
r0024 CO: Act. output frequency
r0025 CO: Act. output voltage r1119 CO: Freq. setpoint before RFG
r0026 CO: Act. DC-link voltage r1170 CO: Frequency setpoint after RFG
r1242 CO: Switch-on level of Vdc-max
r0027 CO: Act. output current r1315 CO: Total boost voltage
r0034 CO: Motor temperature (i2t) r1337 CO: V/f slip frequency
r0036 CO:Inverter overload utilization
r0037 CO: Inverter temperature [°C] r1343 CO: Imax controller freq. output
r0039 CO: Energy consumpt. meter [kWh] r1344 CO: Imax controller volt. output
r1801 CO: Act. pulse frequency
r0067 CO: Act. output current limit r2015[4] CO: PZD from BOP link (USS)
r0071 CO: Max. output voltage r2018[4] CO: PZD from COM link (USS)
r0078 CO: Act. current Isq
r0084 CO: Act. air gap flux r2050[4] CO: PZD from CB
r0086 CO: Act. active current r2110[4] CO: Warning number
r2224 CO: Act. fixed PID setpoint
r0395 CO: Total stator resistance [%] r2250 CO: Output setpoint of PID-MOP
r0755 CO: Act. ADC after scal. [4000h] r2260 CO: PID setpoint after PID-RFG
r0947[8] CO: Last fault code
r0948[12] CO: Fault time r2262 CO: Filtered PID setp. after RFG
r0949[8] CO: Fault value r2266 CO: PID filtered feedback
r2272 CO: PID scaled feedback
r1024 CO: Act. fixed frequency r2273 CO: PID error
r1050 CO: Act. Output freq. of the MOP r2294 CO: Act. PID output
r1078 CO: Total frequency setpoint

2.7 Connector/Binector Output Parameters

ParNo Parameter name ParNo Parameter name
r0019 CO/BO: BOP control word r0722 CO/BO: Binary input values
r0052 CO/BO: Act. status word 1 r0747 CO/BO: State of digital outputs
r0053 CO/BO: Act. status word 2 r0751 CO/BO: Status word of ADC
r0054 CO/BO: Act. control word 1 r0785 CO/BO: Status word of DAC
r0055 CO/BO: Act. control word 2
r1204 CO/BO: Status word:Flying start
r0056 CO/BO: Status of motor control r2197 CO/BO: Monitoring word 1

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 15
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

3 Parameter Description
Note
Level 4 Parameters are not visible with BOP or AOP. They are only for service
purposes.

3.1 Common parameters

r0000 Drive display Min: - Level

P-Group: ALWAYS
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
1
Displays the user selected output as defined in P0005.
Note:
Pressing the "Fn" button for 2 seconds allows the user to view the values of DC link voltage, output
frequency, output voltage, output current, and chosen r0000 setting (defined in P0005).
r0002 Drive state Min: - Level

P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays actual drive state.
Possible Settings:
0 Commissioning mode (P0010 != 0)
1 Drive ready
2 Drive fault active
3 Drive starting (DC-link precharging)
4 Drive running
5 Stopping (ramping down)
Dependency:
State 3 visible only while precharging DC link, and when externally powered communications board is fitted.
P0003 User access level Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALWAYS
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 4
1 1
Defines user access level to parameter sets. The default setting (standard) is sufficient for most simple
applications.
Possible Settings:
0 User defined parameter list - see P0013 for details on use
1 Standard: Allows access into most frequently used parameters.
2 Extended: Allows extended access e.g. to inverter I/O functions.
3 Expert: For expert use only.
4 Service: Only for use by authorized service personal - password protected.
P0004 Parameter filter Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALWAYS
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 22
0 1
Filters available parameters according to functionality to enable a more focussed approach to
commissioning.
Possible Settings:
0 All parameters
2 Inverter
3 Motor
7 Commands, binary I/O
8 ADC and DAC
10 Setpoint channel / RFG
12 Drive features
13 Motor control
20 Communication
21 Alarms / warnings / monitoring
22 Technology controller (e.g. PID)
Example:
P0004 = 22 specifies that only PID parameters will be visible.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

16 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

Dependency:
The parameters are sub-divided into groups (P-Group) according to their functionality. This increases the
transparency and allows a parameter to be quickly searched for. Furthermore, parameter P0004 can be
used to control the ability to be visualized for the operator panel.

Value P-Group Group Parameter area

0 ALWAYS All parameters
2 INVERTER Drive inverter parameters 0200 .... 0299
3 MOTOR Motor parameters 0300 ... 0399 + 0600 .... 0699
7 COMMANDS Control commands, digital I/O 0700 .... 0749 + 0800 ... 0899
8 TERMINAL Analog inputs/outputs 0750 .... 0799
10 SETPOINT Setpoint channel and ramp-function gen. 1000 .... 1199
12 FUNC Drive inverter functions 1200 .... 1299
13 CONTROL Motor open-loop/closed-loop control 1300 .... 1799
20 COMM Communications 2000 .... 2099
21 ALARMS Faults, warnings, monitoring functions 2100 .... 2199
22 TECH Technological controller (PID controller) 2200 .... 2399

Parameters marked "Quick Comm: Yes" in the parameter header can only be set when P0010 = 1 (Quick
Commissioning).
P0005 Display selection Min: 2 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def: 21
Max: 4000
2
Selects display for parameter r0000 (drive display).
Common Settings:
21 Actual frequency
25 Output voltage
26 DC link voltage
27 Output current
Notice:
These settings refer to read only parameter numbers ("rxxxx").
Details:
See relevant "rxxxx" parameter descriptions.
P0006 Display mode Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
2
4
3
Defines mode of display for r0000 (drive display).
Possible Settings:
0 In Ready state alternate between setpoint and output frequency. In run display output frequency
1 In Ready state display setpoint. In run display output frequency.
2 In Ready state alternate between P0005 value and r0020 value. In run display P0005 value
3 In Ready state alternate between r0002 value and r0020 value. In run display r0002 value
4 In all states just display P0005
Note:
- When inverter is not running, the display alternates between the values for "Not Running" and
"Running".
- Per default, the setpoint and actual frequency values are displayed alternately.
P0007 Backlight delay time Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
2000
3
Defines time period after which the backlight display turns off if no operator keys have been pressed.
Value:
P0007 = 0:
Backlight always on (default state).

P0007 = 1 - 2000:
Number of seconds after which the backlight will turn off.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 17
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P0010 Commissioning parameter Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: ALWAYS
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
30
1
Filters parameters so that only those related to a particular functional group are selected.
Possible Settings:
0 Ready
1 Quick commissioning
2 Inverter
29 Download
30 Factory setting
Dependency:
- Reset to 0 for inverter to run.
- P0003 (user access level) also determines access to parameters.
Note:
P0010 = 1
The inverter can be commissioned very quickly and easily by setting P0010 = 1. After that only the important
parameters (e.g.: P0304, P0305, etc.) are visible. The value of these parameters must be entered one after
the other. The end of quick commissioning and the start of internal calculation will be done by setting P3900
= 1 - 3. Afterward parameter P0010 and P3900 will be reset to zero automatically.

P0010 = 2
For service purposes only.

P0010 = 29
To transfer a parameter file via PC tool (e.g.: DriveMonitor, STARTER) parameter P0010 will be set to 29 by
the PC tool. When download has been finished PC tool resets parameter P0010 to zero.

P0010 = 30
When resetting the parameters of inverter P0010 must be set to 30. Resetting of the parameters will be
started by setting parameter P0970 = 1. The inverter will automatically reset all its parameters to their
default settings. This can prove beneficial if you experience problems during parameter setup and wish to
start again. Duration of factory setting will take about 60 s.
P0011 Lock for user defined parameter Min: 0 Level
CStat:
P-Group: FUNC
CUT Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 65535
0 3

Details:
See parameter P0013 (user defined parameter)
P0012 Key for user defined parameter Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
65535
3

Details:
See parameter P0013 (user defined parameter).
P0013[20] User defined parameter Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
65535
3
Defines a limited set of parameters to which the end user will have access.

Instructions for use:

1. Set P0003 = 3 (expert user)
2. Go to P0013 indices 0 to 16 (user list)
3. Enter into P0013 index 0 to 16 the parameters required to be visible in the user-defined list. The
following values are fixed and cannot be changed:
- P0013 index 19 = 12 (key for user defined parameter)
- P0013 index 18 = 10 (commissioning parameter filter)
- P0013 index 17 = 3 (user access level)
4. Set P0003 = 0 to activate the user defined parameter.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

18 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

Index:
P0013[0] : 1st user parameter
P0013[1] : 2nd user parameter
P0013[2] : 3rd user parameter
P0013[3] : 4th user parameter
P0013[4] : 5th user parameter
P0013[5] : 6th user parameter
P0013[6] : 7th user parameter
P0013[7] : 8th user parameter
P0013[8] : 9th user parameter
P0013[9] : 10th user parameter
P0013[10] : 11th user parameter
P0013[11] : 12th user parameter
P0013[12] : 13th user parameter
P0013[13] : 14th user parameter
P0013[14] : 15th user parameter
P0013[15] : 16th user parameter
P0013[16] : 17th user parameter
P0013[17] : 18th user parameter
P0013[18] : 19th user parameter
P0013[19] : 20th user parameter
Dependency:
First, set P0011 ("lock") to a different value than P0012 ("key") to prevent changes to user-defined
parameter. Then, set P0003 to 0 to activate the user-defined list.

When locked and the user-defined parameter is activated, the only way to exit the user-defined parameter
(and view other parameters) is to set P0012 ("key") to the value in P0011 ("lock").
Note:
- Alternatively, set P0010 = 30 (commissioning parameter filter = factory setting) and P0970 = 1 (factory
reset) to perform a complete factory reset.
- The default values of P0011 ("lock") and P0012 ("key") are the same.
P0014[3] Store mode Min: 0 Level
CStat:
P-Group: -
UT Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 1
0 3
Sets the store mode for parameters ("volatile" (RAM) or "nonvolatile" (EEPROM)).
Possible Settings:
0 Volatile (RAM)
1 Nonvolatile (EEPROM)
Index:
P0014[0] : Serial interface COM link
P0014[1] : Serial interface BOP link
P0014[2] : PROFIBUS / CB
Note:
1. With the BOP the parameter will always be stored in the EEPROM.
2. P0014 itself will always be stored in the EEPROM.
3. P0014 will not be changed by performing a factory reset (P0010 = 30 and P0971 = 1).
4. P0014 can be transferred during a DOWNLOAD (P0010 = 29).
5. If "Store request via USS/CB = volatile (RAM)" and "P0014[x] = volatile (RAM)", you can make a
transfer of all parameter values into the nonvolatile memory via P0971.
6. If "Store request via USS/CB" and P0014[x] are not consistent, the setting of P14[x] = "store nonvolatile
(EEPROM)" has always higher priority.

Store request via USS/CB Value of P0014[x] Result

EEPROM RAM EEPROM
EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM
RAM RAM RAM
RAM EEPROM EEPROM

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 19
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

3.2 Diagnosis parameters

r0018 Firmware version Min: - Level

P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: Float Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
1
Displays version number of installed firmware.
r0019 CO/BO: BOP control word Min: - Level

P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays status of operator panel commands.

The settings below are used as the "source" codes for keypad control when connecting to BICO input
parameters.
Bitfields:
Bit00 ON/OFF1 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 OFF2: Electrical stop 0 YES 1 NO
Bit08 JOG right 0 NO 1 YES
Bit11 Reverse (setpoint inversion) 0 NO 1 YES

Bit13 Motor potentiometer MOP up 0 NO 1 YES

Bit14 Motor potentiometer MOP down 0 NO 1 YES
Note:
When BICO technology is used to allocate functions to panel buttons, this parameter displays the actual
status of the relevant command.

The following functions can be "connected" to individual buttons:

- ON/OFF1,
- OFF2,
- JOG,
- REVERSE,
- INCREASE,
- DECREASE
r0020 CO: Freq. setpoint before RFG Min: - Level

P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float Unit: Hz Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays actual frequency setpoint (input from ramp function generator).

r0021 CO: Act. frequency Min: - Level

P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float Unit: Hz Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays actual inverter output frequency (r0021) excluding slip compensation, resonance damping and
frequency limitation.
r0022 Act. rotor speed Min: - Level

P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float Unit: 1/min Def:
Max: -
- 3
Displays calculated rotor speed based on inverter output frequency [Hz] x 120 / number of poles.
60
r0022 [1/min] = r0021[Hz] ⋅
r0313
Note:
This calculation makes no allowance for load-dependent slip.
r0024 CO: Act. Inv. output frequency Min: - Level

P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float Unit: Hz Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays actual output frequency. Slip compensation, resonance damping and frequency limitation are
included.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

20 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

r0025 CO: Act. output voltage Min: - Level

P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float Unit: V Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays [rms] voltage applied to motor.
r0026 CO: Act. DC-link volt. Min: - Level

P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: Float Unit: V Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays DC-link voltage.

0.98 ⋅ r1242

r0027 CO: Act. output current Min: - Level

P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float Unit: A Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays [rms] value of motor current [A].
r0034 CO: Motor temperature (i2t) Min: - Level

P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays calculated motor temperature (I2t model) as [%] of the maximum permissible value.
Note:
The maximum permissible operating temperature (i2t) of the motor is given, if the parameter r0034 has
reached the value of P0614. In this case, the motor will attempt to reduce the motor loading as defined in
P0610 (motor I2t temperature reaction).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 21
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

r0036 CO:Inverter overload utilization Min: - Level

P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max:
-
-
4
Displays inverter overload utilization calculated via I2t model.

The actual I2t value relative to the max. possible I2t value supplies utilization in [%].

If the current exceeds the threshold for P0294 (inverter I2t overload warning), alarm A0505 (inverter I2t) is
generated and the output current of the inverter reduced via P0290 (inverter overload reaction).

If 100 % utilization is exceeded, alarm F0005 (inverter I2t) is tripped.

Example:
Normalized output current
r0027
r0207
100 %

Reaction via P0290

Default: "current reduction"
t
i2t [%]
r0036

P0294 (95 %)

t
A0505
1
0 t
Dependency:
r0036 > 0:
If the nominal current of the inverter is exceeded, utilization will be displayed. Otherwise, 0 % utilization is
displayed.
r0037 CO: Inverter temperature [°C] Min: - Level

P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: Float Unit: °C Def:
Max: -
- 3
Displays internal inverter heatsink temperature.
r0039 CO: Energy consumpt. meter [kWh] Min: - Level

P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: Float Unit: kWh Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays electrical energy used by inverter since display was last reset (see P0040 - reset energy
consumption meter).

t act t act

r0039 = ∫ P W ⋅ dt = ∫ 3 ⋅ u ⋅ i ⋅ cos ϕ ⋅ dt
0 0

Dependency:
Value is reset when P0040 = 1 (reset energy consumption meter).
P0040 Reset energy consumption meter Min: 0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
1
2
Resets value of parameter r0039 (energy consumption meter) to zero.
Possible Settings:
0 No reset
1 Reset r0039 to 0
Dependency:
No reset until "P" is pressed.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

22 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

r0052 CO/BO: Act. status word 1 Min: - Level

P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays first active status word of inverter (bit format) and can be used to diagnose inverter status.
Bitfields:
Bit00 Drive ready 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 Drive ready to run 0 NO 1 YES
Bit02 Drive running 0 NO 1 YES
Bit03 Drive fault active 0 NO 1 YES

Bit04 OFF2 active 0 YES 1 NO

Bit05 OFF3 active 0 YES 1 NO
Bit06 ON inhibit active 0 NO 1 YES
Bit07 Drive warning active 0 NO 1 YES

Bit08 Deviation setpoint / act. value 0 YES 1 NO

Bit09 PZD control 0 NO 1 YES
Bit10 Maximum frequency reached 0 NO 1 YES
Bit11 Warning: Motor current limit 0 YES 1 NO

Bit12 Motor holding brake active 0 NO 1 YES

Bit13 Motor overload 0 YES 1 NO
Bit14 Motor runs right 0 NO 1 YES
Bit15 Inverter overload 0 YES 1 NO
Dependency:
r0052 Bit00 - Bit02:
State-sequence diagram after Power On or ON/OFF1 respectively: ==> see below
Power ON
1
0 t
Drive ready
r0052 1
Bit00
0 t
ON/OFF1
1
0 t
Pre-charging active
1
0 t
Drive ready to run
r0052 1
Bit01
0 t

Pulse enable
1
0 t
Drive running
r0052 1
Bit02
0 t
Ramping finished
r0053 1
Bit09
0 t

r0052 Bit03 "Drive fault active":

Output of Bit3 (Fault) will be inverted on digital output (Low = Fault, High = No Fault).

r0052 Bit08 "Deviation setpoint / act. value" ==> see parameter P2164

r0052 Bit10 "f_act >= P1082 (f_max)" ==> see parameter P1082

r0052 Bit12 "Motor holding brake active" ==> see parameter P1215

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 23
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

r0052 Bit14 "Motor runs right" ==> see below

ON/OFF1
r0054 ON
Bit00 t
Reverse

r0054
Bit11 t

f act

0 t

Drive running

r0052
Bit02 t
Motor runs
right
r0052
Bit14 t
left
not defined
last state is displayed
Details:
The 7-segment display of the bit-parameters (binary parameters) is explained in the Introduction of the
Parameter List.
r0053 CO/BO: Act. status word 2 Min: - Level

P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max: -
- 2
Displays second status word of inverter (in bit format).
Bitfields:
Bit00 DC brake active 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 f_act > P2167 (f_off) 0 NO 1 YES
Bit02 f_act <= P1080 (f_min) 0 NO 1 YES
Bit03 Act. current r0027 > P2170 0 NO 1 YES

Bit04 f_act > P2155 (f_1) 0 NO 1 YES

Bit05 f_act <= P2155 (f_1) 0 NO 1 YES
Bit06 f_act >= setpoint 0 NO 1 YES
Bit07 Act. Vdc r0026 < P2172 0 NO 1 YES

Bit08 Act. Vdc r0026 > P2172 0 NO 1 YES

Bit09 Ramping finished 0 NO 1 YES
Bit10 PID output r2294 == P2292 (PID_min) 0 NO 1 YES
Bit11 PID output r2294 == P2291 (PID_max) 0 NO 1 YES

Bit14 Download data set 0 from AOP 0 NO 1 YES

Bit15 Download data set 1 from AOP 0 NO 1 YES
Note:
- r0053 Bit00 ==> see parameter P1233
- r0053 Bit01 ==> see parameter P2167
- r0053 Bit02 ==> see parameter P1080
- r0053 Bit03 ==> see parameter P2170
- r0053 Bit04 ==> see parameter P2155
- r0053 Bit05 ==> see parameter P2155
- r0053 Bit06 ==> see parameter P2150
- r0053 Bit07 ==> see parameter P2172
- r0053 Bit08 ==> see parameter P2172

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

24 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

r0053 Bit09 "Ramping finished" ==> see below

ON
OFF t

f
f set

f act

Ramping finished

r0053 1
Bit09 0 t
Details:
See description of seven-segment display given in the "Introduction to MICROMASTER System
Parameters" in this manual.
r0054 CO/BO: Act. control word 1 Min: - Level

P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays first control word of inverter and can be used to diagnose which commands are active.
Bitfields:
Bit00 ON/OFF1 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 OFF2: Electrical stop 0 YES 1 NO
Bit02 OFF3: Fast stop 0 YES 1 NO
Bit03 Pulses enabled 0 NO 1 YES

Bit04 RFG enable 0 NO 1 YES

Bit05 RFG start 0 NO 1 YES
Bit06 Setpoint enable 0 NO 1 YES
Bit07 Fault acknowledge 0 NO 1 YES

Bit08 JOG right 0 NO 1 YES

Bit09 JOG left 0 NO 1 YES
Bit10 Control from PLC 0 NO 1 YES
Bit11 Reverse (setpoint inversion) 0 NO 1 YES

Bit13 Motor potentiometer MOP up 0 NO 1 YES

Bit14 Motor potentiometer MOP down 0 NO 1 YES
Bit15 Local / Remote 0 NO 1 YES
Details:
See description of seven-segment display given in the "Introduction to MICROMASTER System
Parameters" in this manual.
r0055 CO/BO: Act. control word 2 Min: - Level

P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays additional control word of inverter and can be used to diagnose which commands are active.
Bitfields:
Bit00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 Fixed frequency Bit 1 0 NO 1 YES
Bit02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 0 NO 1 YES
Bit08 PID enabled 0 NO 1 YES

Bit09 DC brake enabled 0 NO 1 YES

Bit13 External fault 1 0 YES 1 NO
Details:
See description of seven-segment display given in the "Introduction to MICROMASTER System
Parameters" in this handbook.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 25
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

r0056 CO/BO: Status of motor control Min: - Level

P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays status of motor control (MM420: V/f status), which can be used to diagnose inverter status.
Bitfields:
Bit00 Init. control finished 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 Motor demagnetizing finished 0 NO 1 YES
Bit02 Pulses enabled 0 NO 1 YES
Bit03 Voltage soft start selected 0 NO 1 YES

Bit04 Motor excitation finished 0 NO 1 YES

Bit05 Starting boost active 0 NO 1 YES
Bit06 Acceleration boost active 0 NO 1 YES
Bit07 Frequency is negative 0 NO 1 YES

Bit08 Field weakening active 0 NO 1 YES

Bit09 Volts setpoint limited 0 NO 1 YES
Bit10 Slip frequency limited 0 NO 1 YES
Bit11 F_out > F_max Freq. limited 0 NO 1 YES

Bit12 Phase reversal selected 0 NO 1 YES

Bit13 I-max controller active 0 NO 1 YES
Bit14 Vdc-max controller active 0 NO 1 YES
Bit15 KIB (Vdc-min control) active 0 NO 1 YES
Details:
See description of seven-segment display given in the introduction.
r0067 CO: Act. output current limit Min: - Level

P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float Unit: A Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays valid maximum output current of inverter.

Parameter r0067 is influenced/determined by the following factors:

- Rated motor current P0305
- Motor overload factor P0640
- Motor protection in dependency of P0610
- r0067 is less than or equal to maximum inverter current r0209
- Inverter protection in dependency of P0290

Note:
A reduction of r0067 may indicate an inverter overload or a motor overload.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

26 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

r0071 CO: Max. output voltage Min: - Level

P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float Unit: V Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays maximum output voltage.

V
r0071
Vmax Vmax = f(Vdc,MODmax)
(Inverter)

P0304 Vout
Vn (Inverter)
(Motor)

f
P0310
fn
(Motor)

P,
Power

Flux

1
~
f
f
Field weakening
Dependency:
- The actual maximum output voltage depends on the actual incoming line supply voltage.
- The maximum possible output voltage r0071 of the drive inverter is determined by the DC link voltage
r0026 and the maximum modulation depth P1803 in the gating unit.
- The maximum output voltage r0071 is tracked with the DC link voltage so that the highest possible
value is always and automatically achieved.
- The output voltage only reaches the calculated maximum value under steady-state conditions at the
rated load.
- In the no-load and partial load ranges, lower output voltages r0025 are obtained.
r0078 CO: Act. current Isq Min: - Level

P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float Unit: A Def:
Max: -
- 3
Displays component of torque generating current.
r0084 CO: Act. air gap flux Min: - Level

P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max:
-
-
4
Displays air gap flux in [%] relative to the rated motor flux.
r0086 CO: Act. active current Min: - Level

P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float Unit: A Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays active (real part) of motor current.
Dependency:
Applies when V/f control is selected in P1300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 27
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

3.3 Inverter parameters (HW)

P0100 Europe / North America Min: 0 Level
CStat: C
P-Group: QUICK
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
0
2
1
Determines whether power settings (e.g. nominal rating plate power - P0307) are expressed in [kW] or [hp].

The default settings for the nominal rating plate frequency (P0310) and maximum motor frequency (P1082)
are also set automatically here, in addition to reference frequency (P2000).
Possible Settings:
0 Europe [kW], frequency default 50 Hz
1 North America [hp], frequency default 60 Hz
2 North America [kW], frequency default 60 Hz
Dependency:
Where:
- Stop drive first (i.e. disable all pulses) before you change this parameter.
- P0100 can only be changed when P0010 = 1 (Commissioning mode) via the respective Commissioing
interface (e.g. BOP).
- Changing P0100 resets all rated motor parameters as well as other parameters that depend on the
rated motor parameters (see P0340 - calculation of motor parameters).

Changing P0100 overwrites the settings of the DIP50/60 switch (location shown in the diagram below):
1. Parameter P0100 has an higher priority than the DIP50/60 switch.
2. However, after the inverter is powered-on again and P0100 < 2, the DIP50/60 setting will take priority
and overwrite P0100.
3. The DIP50/60 switch does not have any effect, if P0100 = 2.

Quick
Power
commissioning
cycle
P0010 = 1

yes yes
P0100 = 2 P0100 = 2
? ?

no no

no
P0100 = 1
60 ?
50
Hz
Hz yes
DIP50/60 = no
50 Hz
?
DIP50/60 yes

Power in kW Power in kW Power in hp

Frequency 50 Hz Frequency 60 Hz Frequency 60 Hz

P0100 = 0 P0100 = 2 P0100 = 1

Notice:
P0100 setting 2 (==> [kW], frequency default 60 [Hz]) is not overwritten by the setting of DIP switch 2 (see
diagram above).
P0199 Equipment system number Min: 0 Level
CStat:
P-Group: -
UT Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 255
0 2
Equipment system number This parameter has no operation effect.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

28 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

r0200 Act. power stack code number Min: - Level

P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: U32 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Identifies hardware variant as shown in table below.

1 6SE6420-2UC11-2AAx 1/3AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 0,12 no A

2 6SE6420-2UC12-5AAx 1/3AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 0,25 no A
3 6SE6420-2UC13-7AAx 1/3AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 0,37 no A
4 6SE6420-2UC15-5AAx 1/3AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 0,55 no A
5 6SE6420-2UC17-5AAx 1/3AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 0,75 no A
6 6SE6420-2UC21-1BAx 1/3AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 1,1 no B
7 6SE6420-2UC21-5BAx 1/3AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 1,5 no B
8 6SE6420-2UC22-2BAx 1/3AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 2,2 no B
9 6SE6420-2UC23-0CAx 1/3AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 3 no C
10 6SE6420-2UC24-0CAx 3AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 4 no C
11 6SE6420-2UC25-5CAx 3AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 5,5 no C
12 6SE6420-2AB11-2AAx 1AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 0,12 Cl. A A
13 6SE6420-2AB12-5AAx 1AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 0,25 Cl. A A
14 6SE6420-2AB13-7AAx 1AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 0,37 Cl. A A
15 6SE6420-2AB15-5AAx 1AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 0,55 Cl. A A
16 6SE6420-2AB17-5AAx 1AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 0,75 Cl. A A
17 6SE6420-2AB21-1BAx 1AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 1,1 Cl. A B
18 6SE6420-2AB21-5BAx 1AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 1,5 Cl. A B
19 6SE6420-2AB22-2BAx 1AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 2,2 Cl. A B
20 6SE6420-2AB23-0CAx 1AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 3 Cl. A C
21 6SE6420-2AB23-1CAx 3AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 3 Cl. A C
22 6SE6420-2AB24-0CAx 3AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 4 Cl. A C
23 6SE6420-2AB25-0CAx 3AC200-240V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 5,5 Cl. A C
24 6SE6420-2UD13-7AAx 3AC380-480V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 0,37 no A
25 6SE6420-2UD15-5AAx 3AC380-480V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 0,55 no A
26 6SE6420-2UD17-5AAx 3AC380-480V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 0,75 no A
27 6SE6420-2UD21-1AAx 3AC380-480V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 1,1 no A
28 6SE6420-2UD21-5AAx 3AC380-480V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 1,5 no A
29 6SE6420-2UD22-2BAx 3AC380-480V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 2,2 no B
30 6SE6420-2UD23-0BAx 3AC380-480V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 3 no B
31 6SE6420-2UD24-0BAx 3AC380-480V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 4 no B
32 6SE6420-2UD25-5CAx 3AC380-480V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 5,5 no C
33 6SE6420-2UD27-5CAx 3AC380-480V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 7,5 no C
34 6SE6420-2UD31-1CAx 3AC380-480V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 11 no C
35 6SE6420-2AD22-2BAx 3AC380-480V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 2,2 Cl. A B
36 6SE6420-2AD23-0BAx 3AC380-480V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 3 Cl. A B
37 6SE6420-2AD24-0BAx 3AC380-480V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 4 Cl. A B
38 6SE6420-2AD25-5CAx 3AC380-480V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 5,5 Cl. A C
39 6SE6420-2AD27-5CAx 3AC380-480V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 7,5 Cl. A C
40 6SE6420-2AD31-1CAx 3AC380-480V +10% -10% 47-63Hz 11 Cl. A C

Notice:
Parameter r0200 = 0 indicates that no power stack has been identified.
P0201 Power stack code number Min: 0 Level
CStat: C
P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
65535
3
Confirms actual power stack identified.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 29
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

r0203 Act. inverter type Min: - Level

P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Type number of actual inverter identified.
Possible Settings:
1 MICROMASTER 420
2 MICROMASTER 440
3 MICRO- / COMBIMASTER 411
4 MICROMASTER 410
5 Reserved
6 MICROMASTER 440 PX
7 MICROMASTER 430
r0204 Power stack features Min: - Level

P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: U32 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays hardware features of power stack.
Bitfields:
Bit00 DC input voltage 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 RFI filter 0 NO 1 YES
Note:
Parameter r0204 = 0 indicates that no power stack has been identified.
r0206 Rated inverter power [kW] / [hp] Min: - Level

P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: Float Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays nominal rated motor power from inverter.
Dependency:
Value is displayed in [kW] or [hp] depending on setting for P0100 (operation for Europe / North America).

r0206 [hp] = 0.75 ⋅ r0206 [kW]

r0207[2] Rated inverter current Min: - Level

P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: Float Unit: A Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays rated output current of inverter.
r0207[0] : Rated inverter current
r0207[1] : Rated motor current
r0208 Rated inverter voltage Min: - Level

P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: U32 Unit: V Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays nominal AC supply voltage of inverter.
Value:
r0208 = 230 : 200 - 240 V +/- 10 %
r0208 = 400 : 380 - 480 V +/- 10 %
r0208 = 575 : 500 - 600 V +/- 10 %
r0209 Maximum inverter current Min: - Level

P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: Float Unit: A Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays maximum output current of inverter.
Dependency:
Parameter r0209 depends on the derating which is affected by pulse frequency P1800, ambient
temperature and altitude. The data of deration is given in the Operating Insrtruction.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

30 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P0210 Supply voltage Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: V
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
230
1000
3
Parameter P0210 defines the supply voltage.

Its default value depends upon the type of inverter. If P0210 does not correspond to the supply voltage, then
it must be modified.

When P0210 has been modified, the following thresholds are changed:
Vdc_max switch-on level = 1.15 ⋅ 2 ⋅ P0210
Compound braking switch-on level = 1.13 ⋅ 2 ⋅ P0210
Dependency:
Optimizes Vdc controller, which extends the ramp-down time if regenerative energy from motor would
otherwise cause DC link overvoltage trips.

Reducing the value enables controller to cut in earlier and reduce the risk of overvoltage.

Set P1254 ("Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels") = 0. Cut-in levels for Vdc-controller and compound braking
are then derived directly from P0210 (supply voltage).
Note:
- If mains voltage is higher than value entered, automatic deactivation of the Vdc controller may occur to
avoid acceleration of the motor. An alarm will be issued in this case (A0910).
- Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.
r0231[2] Max. cable length Min: - Level

P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: U16 Unit: m Def:
Max: -
- 3
Indexed parameter to display maximum allowable cable length between inverter and motor.
Index:
r0231[0] : Max. allowed unscreened cable length
r0231[1] : Max. allowed screened cable length
Notice:
For full EMC compliance, the screened cable must not exceed 25 m in length when an EMC filter is fitted.
P0290 Inverter overload reaction Min: 0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 3
2 3
Selects reaction of inverter to an internal over-temperature.

Following physical values influence the inverter overload protection (see diagram):

- heat sink temperature

- inverter I²t
Inverter monitoring Inverter overload reaction
P0290

A0504
r0036 i2t
P0294 i_max
control A0505

r0037 Heat sink A0506

temperature
P0292 f_pulse F0004
control
F0005

Possible Settings:
0 Reduce output frequency
1 Trip (F0004)
2 Reduce pulse frequency and output frequency
3 Reduce pulse frequency then trip (F0004)
Notice:
P0290 = 0:
Reduction of output frequency is only effective if the load is also reduced. This is for example valid for
variable torque applications with a quadratic torque characteristic as pumps or fans.

A trip will always result, if the action taken does not sufficiently reduce internal temperature.

The pulse frequency P1800 is reduced only if higher than 2 kHz. The actual pulse frequency is displayed in
parameter r1801.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 31
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P0291 Inverter protection Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1
15
4
Bit 00 for enabling/disabling automatic pulse frequency reduction at output frequencies below 2 Hz. The
benefit is to reduce the noises at frequencies below 2 Hz.
Bitfields:
Bit00 Pulse frequency reduced below 2Hz 0 NO 1 YES
Bit03 Enable fan 0 NO 1 YES
Caution:
P0291 Bit 00 = 0:
No automatic pulse frequency is applied at frequencies below 2 Hz. There is a risk of damage to the inverter
if DC-braking or greater boost are used respectively.
Details:
See P0290 (inverter overload reaction)
P0292 Inverter temperature warning Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: °C
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 25
15 3
Defines the temperature difference (in ºC) between the Overtemperature trip threshold and the warning
threshold of the inverter. The trip threshold is stored internally by the inverter and cannot be changed by the
user.

If the actual inverter temperature (r0037) exceeds the corresponding threshold, a warning A0504, if the
temperature still increases then a fault F0004 will be displayed.
P0294 Inverter I2t overload warning Min: 10.0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def: 95.0
Max: 100.0
4
Defines the [%] value at which alarm A0505 (inverter I2t) is generated.

Inverter I2t calculation is used to determine a maximum tolerable period for inverter overload. The I2t
calculation value is deemed = 100 % when this maximum tolerable period is reached.
Dependency:
That the output current of the inverter has been reduced and that the value of I2t does not exceed 100%.
Note:
P0294 = 100 % corresponds to stationary nominal load.
P0295 Inverter fan off delay time Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def: 0
Max: 3600
3
Defines inverter fan switch off delay time in seconds after drive has stopped.
Note:
Setting to 0, inverter fan will switch off when the drive stops, that is no delay.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

32 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

3.4 Motor parameters

P0300 Select motor type Min: 1 Level

CStat: C
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
1
2
2
Selects motor type.

This parameter is required during commissioning to select motor type and optimize inverter performance.
Most motors are asynchronous; if in doubt, use the formula below.

60
x = P0310 ⋅
P0311

If the result is a whole number, the motor is synchronous.

Possible Settings:
1 Asynchronous motor
2 Synchronous motor
Dependency:
Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).

If synchronous motor is selected, the following functions are not available:

- P0308 Power factor
- P0309 Motor efficiency
- P0346 Magnetization time
- P0347 Demagnetization time
- P1335 Slip compensation
- P1336 Slip limit
- P0320 Motor magnetizing current
- P0330 Rated motor slip
- P0331 Rated magnetization current
- P0332 Rated power factor
- P0384 Rotor time constant
- P1200, P1202, P1203 Flying start
- P1230, P1232, P1233 DC braking

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 33
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P0304 Rated motor voltage Min: 10 Level

CStat: C
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: V
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
230
2000
1
Nominal motor voltage [V] from rating plate. Following diagram shows a typical rating plate with the
locations of the relevant motor data.

Dependency:
- Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
- Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

34 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

Caution:
The input of rating plate data must correspond with the wiring of the motor (star / delta). This means, if delta
wiring is used for the motor, delta rating plate data has to be entered.

P0305 Rated motor current Min: 0.01 Level

CStat: C
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: A
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
3.25
10000.00
1
Nominal motor current [A] from rating plate - see diagram in P0304.
Dependency:
- Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
- Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.
- Depends also on P0320 (motor magnetization current).
Note:
The maximum value of P0305 depends on the maximum inverter current r0209 and the motor type:
P0305 max, asyn = r0209
P0305 max, syn = 2 ⋅ r0209

It is recommanded that the ratio of P0305 (rated motor current) and r0207 (rated inverter current) should not
be lower than:
1 P0305
≤
8 r0207

The absolut minimum value of P0305 is defined as 1/32 times inverter rated current (r0207).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 35
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P0307 Rated motor power Min: 0.01 Level

CStat: C
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
0.12
2000.00
1
Nominal motor power [kW/hp] from rating plate.
Dependency:
- If P0100 = 1, values will be in [hp] - see diagram P0304 (rating plate).
- Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
- Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.
P0308 Rated motor cosPhi Min: 0.000 Level
CStat: C
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
0.000
1.000
1
Nominal motor power factor (cosPhi) from rating plate - see diagram P0304.
Dependency:
- Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
- Visible only when P0100 = 0 or 2, (motor power entered in [kW]).
- Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.

- Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. Calculated value see r0332.

P0309 Rated motor efficiency Min: 0.0 Level
CStat: C
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: %
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
0.0
99.9
1
Nominal motor efficiency in [%] from rating plate.
Dependency:
- Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
- Visible only when P0100 = 1, (i.e. motor power entered in [hp]).
- Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.

- Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. Calculated value see r0332.

Note:
P0309 = 100 % corresponds to superconducting.
Details:
See diagram in P0304 (rating plate).
P0310 Rated motor frequency Min: 12.00 Level
CStat: C
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
50.00
650.00
1
Nominal motor frequency [Hz] from rating plate.
Dependency:
- Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
- Pole pair number recalculated automatically if parameter is changed.
Details:
See diagram in P0304 (rating plate)
P0311 Rated motor speed Min: 0 Level
CStat: C
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: 1/min
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
0
40000
1
Nominal motor speed [rpm] from rating plate.
Dependency:
- Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
- Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value.
- Slip compensation in V/f control requires rated motor speed for correct operation.
- Pole pair number recalculated automatically if parameter is changed.
- Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.

- Required for vector control and V/f control with speed controller.
Details:
See diagram in P0304 (rating plate)

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

36 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

r0313 Motor pole pairs Min: - Level

P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays number of motor pole pairs that the inverter is currently using for internal calculations.
Value:
r0313 = 1 : 2-pole motor
r0313 = 2 : 4-pole motor
etc.
Dependency:
Recalculated automatically when P0310 (rated motor frequency) or P0311 (rated motor speed) is changed.

P0310
r0313 = 60 ⋅
P0311

P0320 Motor magnetizing current Min: 0.0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
0.0
99.0
3
Defines motor magnetization current in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current).
Dependency:
Setting P0320 = 0: causes calculation by
- P0340 = 1 (data entered from rating plate) or by
- P3900 = 1 - 3 (end of quick commissioning). The calculated value is displayed in parameter r0331.
r0330 Rated motor slip Min: - Level

P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max: -
- 3
Displays nominal motor slip in [%] relative to P0310 (rated motor frequency) and P0311 (rated motor
speed).
P0311
P0310 − ⋅ r0313
r0330 [%] = 60 ⋅ 100 %
P0310

r0331 Rated magnetization current Min: - Level

P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float Unit: A Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays calculated magnetizing current of motor in [A].
r0332 Rated power factor Min: - Level

P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays power factor for motor
Dependency:
Value is calculated internally if P0308 (rated motor cosPhi) set to 0; otherwise, value entered in P0308 is
displayed.
P0335 Motor cooling Min: 0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: Yes Max: 1
Def: 0 2
Selects motor cooling system used.
Possible Settings:
0 Self-cooled: Using shaft mounted fan attached to motor
1 Force-cooled: Using separately powered cooling fan
Caution:
The following combination of parameter setting should not be combined:
- P0610 = 1 and P0335 = 0 or 2 :
When P0335 = 0 or 2 the inverter cools the motor using a shaft mounted fan. If this is used in
conjunction with P0610 the cooling of the motor will be inefficient.
In essence, if the i2t calculation reduces the output frequency, then the shaft mounted fan will also reduce
its cooling effect, the motor will then eventually overheat and trip.
- Exception:
Applications with variable torque the reduction of max. current leeds automatically to a reduction of the
load / output current.
Notice:
Motors of series 1LA1 and 1LA8 have an internal fan. This internal motor fan must not be confused with the
fan at the end of the motor shaft.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 37
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P0340 Calculation of motor parameters Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
1
2
Calculates various motor parameters (see table below). This parameter is required during commissioning to
optimize inverter performance.
Possible Settings:
0 No calculation
1 Complete parameterization
Note:
P0340 = 1
P0344 Motor weight x
P0346 Magnetization time x
P0347 Demagnetization time x
P0350 Stator resistance (line-to-line) x
P0611 Motor I2t time constant x
P1253 Vdc-controller output limitation x
P1316 Boost end frequency x
P2000 Reference frequency x
P2002 Reference current x

P0344 Motor weight Min: 1.0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: kg
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
9.4
6500.0
3
Specifies motor weight [kg].
Note:
- This value is used in the motor thermal model.
- It is normally calculated automatically from P0340 (motor parameters) but can also be entered
manually.
- Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.
P0346 Magnetization time Min: 0.000 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1.000
20.000
3
Sets magnetization time [s], i.e. waiting time between pulse enable and start of ramp-up. Motor
magnetization builds up during this time.

Magnetization time is normally calculated automatically from the motor data and corresponds to the rotor
time constant (r0384).
Note:
- If boost settings are higher than 100 %, magnetization time may be reduced.
- Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.
- An excessive reduction of this time can result in insufficient motor magnetization.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

38 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P0347 Demagnetization time Min: 0.000 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1.000
20.000
3
Defines the de-magnetization time for the connected induction motor.

The de-magnetization time is the time that must expire between powering-down the drive (OFF2 or a drive
inverter fault/error) and powering-up again. The drive inverter is prevented from being powered-up again
within this time interval. The flux in the induction motor is reduced to a low value during this de-
magnetization time.

Note:
- The de-magnetization time is approximately 250% of the rotor time constant (r0384) in seconds.
- The pre-assignment (default value) depends on the drive inverter type and its rated/nominal values.
- It is not active after a normal ramp-down - i.e. after OFF1 or OFF3.
- If this time is excessively shortened, then the drive inverter will be tripped (shut down) due to an
overcurrent condition.
- If a synchronous motor is connected, the de-magnetization time should be set to 0.
P0350 Stator resistance (line-to-line) Min: 0.00001 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Ohm
QuickComm.: No
Def: 4.00000
Max: 2000.00000
3
Stator resistance value in [Ohms] for connected motor (from line-to-line). The parameter value includes the
cable resistance.

P0350 = 2 ⋅ (R Cable + R S )

There are three ways to determine the value for this parameter:
1. Calculate using
- P0340 = 1 (data entered from rating plate) or
- P0010 = 1, P3900 = 1,2 or 3 (end of quick commissioning).
2. Measure using P1910 = 1 (motor data identification - value for stator resistance is overwritten).
3. Measure manually using an Ohmmeter.
Note:
- Since measured line-to-line, this value may appear to be higher (up to 2 times higher) than expected.
- The value entered in P0350 (stator resistance) is the one obtained by the method last used.
- Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.
r0370 Stator resistance [%] Min: - Level

P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max: -
- 4
Displays standardized stator resistance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value) in [%] as a function of the
actual stator winding temperature.
Note:
Rated motor impedance:
V ph VN P0304
ZN = = = <=> 100 %
I ph 3 ⋅ IN 3 ⋅ P0305

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 39
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

r0372 Cable resistance [%] Min: - Level

P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max:
-
-
4
Displays standardized cable resistance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value)in [%]. It is estimated to be
20 % of the stator resistance.
Note:
Rated motor impedance:
V ph VN P0304
ZN = = = <=> 100 %
I ph 3 ⋅ IN 3 ⋅ P0305

r0373 Rated stator resistance [%] Min: - Level

P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max:
-
-
4
Displays the nominal stator resistance of the motor equivalent circuit diagram (phase value) as a [%] at the
ambient temperature + temperature rise of the stator winding.
Note:

VN P0304
= = <=> 100 %
3 ⋅ IN 3 ⋅ P0305

r0374 Rotor resistance [%] Min: - Level

P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max:
-
-
4
Displays the rotor resistance of the motor equivalent circuit diagram (phase value) as a [%] at the ambient
temperature (in the cold state).
Note:
Rated motor impedance:
V ph VN P0304
ZN = = = <=> 100 %
I ph 3 ⋅ IN 3 ⋅ P0305

r0376 Rated rotor resistance [%] Min: - Level

P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max:
-
-
4
Displays the nominal rotor resistance of the motor equivalent circuit diagram (phase value) as a [%] at the
ambient temperature + temperature rise of the rotor winding.
Note:
Rated motor impedance:
V ph VN P0304
ZN = = = <=> 100 %
I ph 3 ⋅ IN 3 ⋅ P0305

r0377 Total leakage reactance [%] Min: - Level

P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max:
-
-
4
Displays standardized total leakage reactance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value) in [%].
Note:
Rated motor impedance:
V ph VN P0304
ZN = = = <=> 100 %
I ph 3 ⋅ IN 3 ⋅ P0305

r0382 Main reactance [%] Min: - Level

P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max:
-
-
4
Displays standardized main reactance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value) in [%].
Note:
Rated motor impedance:
V ph VN P0304
ZN = = = <=> 100 %
I ph 3 ⋅ IN 3 ⋅ P0305

r0384 Rotor time constant Min: - Level

P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float Unit: ms Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays calculated rotor time constant [ms].

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

40 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

r0386 Total leakage time constant Min: - Level

P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float Unit: ms Def:
Max:
-
-
4
Displays total leakage time constant of motor.
r0395 CO: Total stator resistance [%] Min: - Level

P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays the actual stator resistance (combined stator/cable resistance) of the motor as a [%] as a function
of the actual stator winding temperature.
Note:
Rated motor impedance:
V ph VN P0304
ZN = = = <=> 100 %
I ph 3 ⋅ IN 3 ⋅ P0305

P0610 Motor I2t reaction Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
2
2
3
Defines reaction when motor I2t reaches warning threshold.
Possible Settings:
0 Warning, no reaction, no trip
1 Warning, Imax reduction, trip F0011
2 Warning, no reaction, trip F0011
Dependency:
See parameter P0611, P0614.
Note:
P0610 = 1:
If the max. permissible current Imax is reduced, this results in a lower output frequency.

The motor I²t monitoring function is used to protect the motor against overheating. The motor temperature
will be dependent on many factors, including the size of the motor, the ambient temperature, the previous
history of the motors loading, and of course, the load current. (The square of the current actually determines
the heating of the motor and the temperature rises with time - hence I²t).

Because most motors are cooled by fans integrated in the motor and running at the motor speed, the speed
of the motor is also important. Clearly a motor running with a high current (maybe due to boost) and a low
speed, will overheat more quickly than one running at 50 or 60 Hz, full load. The MM4 take account of these
factors.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 41
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P0611 Motor I2t time constant Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
100
16000
2
Thermal Time constant for the motor.

The time until the thermal limit of a motor is reached, is calculated via the thermal time constant. A higher
value increases the time at which the motor thermal limit is reached.

The value of P0611 is estimated according to the motor data during quick commissioning or is calculated
using P0340 (Calculating of the motor parameters). When the calculation of motor parameters during quick
commission is complete the stored value can be replaced by the value given by the motor manufacturer.
Example:
For a 2 pole 1LA7063 motor the value is 8 min (see table). The value for P0611 is calculated as follows:
s
P0611 = 8 min ⋅ 60 = 480 s
min

For Siemens standard motors 1LA7 the thermal time constant values are given in minutes (see following
table):
Type 2 pole 4 pole 6 pole 8 pole
1LA7050 13 13 - -
1LA7053 13 13 - -
1LA7060 8 11 - -
1LA7063 8 13 12 -
1LA7070 8 10 12 12
1LA7073 8 10 12 12
1LA7080 8 10 12 12
1LA7083 10 10 12 12
1LA7090 5 9 12 12
1LA7096 6 11 12 14
1LA7106 8 12 12 16
1LA7107 - 12 - 16
1LA7113 14 11 13 12
1LA7130 11 10 13 10
1LA7131 11 - - -
1LA7133 - 10 14 10
1LA7134 - - 16 -
1LA7163 15 19 20 12
1LA7164 15 - - 14
1LA7166 15 19 20 14
Dependency:
P0611 < 99 s (I2t-calculation inactive):
To activate I2t calculation set P0611 to a value > 99 s.
Note:
Mode of operation of I²t:
The square of the normalized motor current (measured motor current r0027 divided by the rated motor
current P0305) weighted with the thermal motor time constant results in the I²t value of the motor. In
addition, the output frequency (motor speed) is incorporated in the calculation to take into consideration the
cooling effect of the motor fan. If parameter P0335 is changed to a force-ventilated motor, then the
calculation is appropriately modified. The I²t value represents a dimension for the temperature rise /
temperature of the motor.

If users do not enter parameters such as P0344 (motor weight), then a value, based on a Siemens motor is
used. When required, the motor time constant can be changed using P0611, which is the same as
overwriting the calculated value.

The I²t value that is obtained is displayed in r0034. If this value reaches the value defined in P0614 (default:
100%), an alarm message A0511 is output and, depending on P0610 a response is initiated or, when a
shutdown threshold is reached, a fault is output.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

42 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

Trip threshold
1.1⋅ P0614
P0611
2 Motor
⎛ r0027 ⎞ F0011
⎜ ⎟ i2t
⎝ P0305 ⎠ r0034
temp. I_max reduction
t
( i2 t ) reaction
r0021 A0511
P0610
P0310
P0335
P0614
Warning threshold

P0614 Motor I2t warning level Min: 0.0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
100.0
400.0
2
Defines the [%] value at which alarm A0511 (motor overtemperature) is generated.

The motor temperature will be dependent on many factors, including the size of the motor, the ambient
temperature, the previous history of the loading of the motor, and of course, the load current. (The square of
the current actually determines the heating of the motor and the temperature rises with time - hence I²t). A
motor-I2t-value of P0614 means that the motor has reached its maximum permissible operating
temperature. The actual I2t-value is displayed in parameter r0034.
Dependency:
A motor over-temperature trip (F0011) is produced at 110 % of this level.
i2ttrip [%] = i2t warn [%] ⋅ 1.1 = P0614 ⋅ 1.1

1.1⋅ P0614 Trip threshold F0011

Warning threshold A0511
P0614
Motor temperature class f (current / speed)

f (motor weight / cooling)

t
P0611

P0640 Motor overload factor [%] Min: 10.0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
150.0
400.0
2
Defines motor overload current limit in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current).
Dependency:
Limited to maximum inverter current or to 400 % of rated motor current (P0305), whichever is the lower.
min (r0209, 4 ⋅ P0305)
P0640max = ⋅ 100
P0305
Details:
See function diagram for current limitation.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 43
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

3.5 Command source

P0700 Selection of command source Min: 0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
2
6
1
Selects digital command source.
Possible Settings:
0 Factory default setting
1 BOP (keypad)
2 Terminal
4 USS on BOP link
5 USS on COM link
6 CB on COM link
Example:
Changing form P0700 = 1 to P0700 = 2 sets all digital inputs to default settings.

BOP

Terminals

USS P0700 = 2
Sequence control
BOP link
USS
COM link
CB Setpoint Motor
COM link channel control

Notice:
Setting 4 (USS on BOP link) is also used for STARTER via PC connection kit or AOP control.
Setting 5 (USS on COM link) is used for remote AOP communications via RS485.
Caution:
Be aware, by changing of parameter P0700 all BI parameters are reset to the default value or modified as
listed in the table below.

If the Inverter is being controlled via the AOP, select USS (with the corresponding interface) for the
Command Source. If the AOP is connected to the BOP-Link Interface, then set Parameter P0700 to the
value 4 (P0700 = 4).
Note:
Changing this parameter sets (to default) all settings on item selected (see table).

P0700 = 0 P0700 = 1 P0700 = 2 P0700 = 4 P0700 = 5 P0700 = 6

P0701 1 0 1 0 0 0
P0702 12 0 12 0 0 0
P0703 9 9 9 9 9 9
P0704 0 0 0 0 0 0
P0705 15 15 15 15 15 15
P0731 52.3 52.3 52.3 52.3 52.3 52.3

P0800 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

P0801 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

P0840 722.0 19.0 722.0 2032.0 2036.0 2090.0

P0842 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
P0844 1.0 19.1 1.0 2032.1 2036.1 2090.1
P0845 19.1 19.1 19.1 19.1 19.1 19.1
P0848 1.0 1.0 1.0 2032.2 2036.2 2090.2
P0849 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
P0852 1.0 1.0 1.0 2032.3 2036.3 2090.3

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

44 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P0700 = 0 P0700 = 1 P0700 = 2 P0700 = 4 P0700 = 5 P0700 = 6

P1020 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
P1021 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
P1022 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
P1035 19.13 19.13 19.13 2032.13 2036.13 2090.13
P1036 19.14 19.14 19.14 2032.14 2036.14 2090.14
P1055 0.0 19.8 0.0 2032.8 2036.8 2090.8
P1056 0.0 0.0 0.0 2032.9 2036.9 2090.9
P1074 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
P1110 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
P1113 722.1 19.11 722.1 2032.11 2036.11 2090.11
P1124 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
P1140 1.0 1.0 1.0 2032.4 2036.4 2090.4
P1141 1.0 1.0 1.0 2032.5 2036.5 2090.5
P1142 1.0 1.0 1.0 2032.6 2036.6 2090.6
P1230 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

P2103 722.2 722.2 722.2 722.2 722.2 722.2

P2104 0.0 0.0 0.0 2032.7 2036.7 2090.7
P2106 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

P2200 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

P2220 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
P2221 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
P2222 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
P2235 19.13 19.13 19.13 2032.13 2036.13 2090.13
P2236 19.14 19.14 19.14 2032.14 2036.14 2090.14

P0810

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 45
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

3.6 Digital inputs

P0701 Function of digital input 1 Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1
99
2
Selects function of digital input 1.

DIN channel (e.g. DIN1 - PNP (P0725 = 1))

Kl.8 PNP/NPN DIN

P24 (PNP) 0 ... 1 P0701
Kl.9 P0725 (1)
0 V (NPN)
Debounce time: DIN
24 0 ... 3
V P0724 (3)

Function
0 0 24 V T 0
r0722 Pxxxx BI: ...
1 1 r0722 .0
CO/BO: Bin.inp.val

0V
Possible Settings:
0 Digital input disabled
1 ON/OFF1
2 ON reverse /OFF1
3 OFF2 - coast to standstill
4 OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9 Fault acknowledge
10 JOG right
11 JOG left
12 Reverse
13 MOP up (increase frequency)
14 MOP down (decrease frequency)
15 Fixed setpoint (Direct selection)
16 Fixed setpoint (Direct selection + ON)
17 Fixed setpoint (Binary coded selection + ON)
21 Local/remote
25 DC brake enable
29 External trip
33 Disable additional freq setpoint
99 Enable BICO parameterization
Dependency:
Setting 99 (enable BICO parameterization) requires
- P0700 command source or
- P0010 = 1, P3900 = 1, 2 or 3 quick commissioning or
- P0010 = 30, P0970 = 1 factory reset in order to reset.
Notice:
- Setting 99 (BICO) for expert use only.
- To change back the setting 99 in any of the DIN function parameters it is necessary to alter P0700.
- For reversing the drive 2 DINs are necessary : one for ON command and another for Reverse.
- Settings 3 (OFF2) and 4 (OFF3) are low active.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

46 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P0702 Function of digital input 2 Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
12
99
2
Selects function of digital input 2.
Possible Settings:
0 Digital input disabled
1 ON/OFF1
2 ON reverse /OFF1
3 OFF2 - coast to standstill
4 OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9 Fault acknowledge
10 JOG right
11 JOG left
12 Reverse
13 MOP up (increase frequency)
14 MOP down (decrease frequency)
15 Fixed setpoint (Direct selection)
16 Fixed setpoint (Direct selection + ON)
17 Fixed setpoint (Binary coded selection + ON)
21 Local/remote
25 DC brake enable
29 External trip
33 Disable additional freq setpoint
99 Enable BICO parameterization
Details:
See P0701 (function of digital input1).
P0703 Function of digital input 3 Min: 0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
9
99
2
Selects function of digital input 3.
Possible Settings:
0 Digital input disabled
1 ON/OFF1
2 ON reverse /OFF1
3 OFF2 - coast to standstill
4 OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9 Fault acknowledge
10 JOG right
11 JOG left
12 Reverse
13 MOP up (increase frequency)
14 MOP down (decrease frequency)
15 Fixed setpoint (Direct selection)
16 Fixed setpoint (Direct selection + ON)
17 Fixed setpoint (Binary coded selection + ON)
21 Local/remote
25 DC brake enable
29 External trip
33 Disable additional freq setpoint
99 Enable BICO parameterization
Details:
See P0701 (function of digital input 1).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 47
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P0704 Function of digital input 4 Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
99
2
Selects function of digital input 4 (via analog input).
Possible Settings:
0 Digital input disabled
1 ON/OFF1
2 ON reverse /OFF1
3 OFF2 - coast to standstill
4 OFF3 - quick ramp-down
9 Fault acknowledge
10 JOG right
11 JOG left
12 Reverse
13 MOP up (increase frequency)
14 MOP down (decrease frequency)
21 Local/remote
25 DC brake enable
29 External trip
33 Disable additional freq setpoint
99 Enable BICO parameterization
Details:
See P0701 (function of digital input 1).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

48 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P0719[2] Selection of cmd. & freq. setp. Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
67
3
Central switch to select control command source for inverter.

Switches command and setpoint source between freely programmable BICO parameters and fixed
command/setpoint profiles. Command and setpoint sources can be changed independently.

The tens digit chooses the command source and the units digit chooses the setpoint source.

The two indices of this parameter are used for local/remote switching. The local/remote signal switches
between these settings.

The default setting is 0 for the first index (i.e. normal parameterization is active).
The second index is for control via BOP (i.e. activating the local/remote signal will then switch to BOP).
Possible Settings:
0 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = BICO parameter
1 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = MOP setpoint
2 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint
3 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Fixed frequency
4 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS on BOP link
5 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS on COM link
6 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = CB on COM link
7 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog 2 setp
10 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = BICO parameter
11 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = MOP setpoint
12 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint
13 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Fixed frequency
15 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = USS on COM link
16 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = CB on COM link
17 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog 2 setp
40 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = BICO parameter
41 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = MOP setpoint
42 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = Analog setpoint
43 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = Fixed frequency
44 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = USS on BOP link
45 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = USS on COM link
46 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = CB on COM link
47 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = Analog 2 setp
50 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = BICO parameter
51 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = MOP setpoint
52 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = Analog setpoint
53 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = Fixed frequency
54 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = USS on BOP link
55 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = USS on COM link
57 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = Analog 2 setp
60 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = BICO parameter
61 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = MOP setpoint
62 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = Analog setpoint
63 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = Fixed frequency
64 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = USS on BOP link
66 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = CB on COM link
67 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = Analog 2 setp
Index:
P0719[0] : 1st Control source (Remote)
P0719[1] : 2nd Control source (Local)
Note:
Using parameter P0719, it is possible to select the command or setpoint sources without changing the BICO
connections (this is contrary to P0700 / P1000). However, it is not possible to change the complete
connection table (refer to P0700 and P1000). Using P0719, depending on the value, only the BICO
parameters listed in the following table are internally overwritten - this means that these BICO parameters
are inactive.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 49
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

Command source:
P0719 =
0 ... 9 10 ... 19 40 ... 49 50 ... 59 60 ... 69
P0840 X
P0844 X
P0848 X X
P0852 X X
P1035 X
P1036 X X
P1055 X
P1056 X X
P1113 X
P1140 X X
P1141 X X
P1142 X X
P1143 X X

Setpoint source:
P0719 =
0, 10, 20, 40, 50, 60 all other values
P1070 X

X = BICO parameter active

= BICO parameter inactive

BICO connections made previously remain unchanged.

r0720 Number of digital inputs Min: - Level

P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays number of digital inputs.
r0722 CO/BO: Binary input values Min: - Level

P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays status of digital inputs.
Bitfields:
Bit00 Digital input 1 0 OFF 1 ON
Bit01 Digital input 2 0 OFF 1 ON
Bit02 Digital input 3 0 OFF 1 ON
Bit03 Digital input 4 (via ADC) 0 OFF 1 ON
Note:
Segment is lit when signal is active.
P0724 Debounce time for digital inputs Min: 0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
3
3
3
Defines debounce time (filtering time) used for digital inputs.
Possible Settings:
0 No debounce time
1 2.5 ms debounce time
2 8.2 ms debounce time
3 12.3 ms debounce time

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

50 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P0725 PNP / NPN digital inputs Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1
1
3
Switches between active high (PNP) and active low (NPN). This is valid for all digital inputs simultaneously.

The following is valid by using the internal supply:

Possible Settings:
0 NPN mode ==> low active
1 PNP mode ==> high active
Value:
NPN: Terminals 5/6/7 must be connected via terminal 9 ( 0 V).
PNP: Terminals 5/6/7 must be connected via terminal 8 (24 V).

3.7 Digital outputs

r0730 Number of digital outputs Min: - Level

P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays number of digital outputs (relays).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 51
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P0731 BI: Function of digital output 1 Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
52:3
4000:0
2
Defines source of digital output 1.

DOUT channel Invert DOUTs

0 ... 1 int. 24 V
P0748 (0) CO/BO: State DOUTs
max. 100 mA
r0747
BI: Fct. of DOUT 1 r0747.0
Kl.8
P0731 0
Function rxxxx.y (52:3)
xxxx.y -1 Kl.11
1
P0731 = xxxx.y
NO Kl.10

Relay : max. load capability

DC 30 V / 5 A Kl.9
AC 250 V / 2 A
max. opening / closing time
5 / 10 ms
Common Settings:
52.0 Drive ready 0 Closed
52.1 Drive ready to run 0 Closed
52.2 Drive running 0 Closed
52.3 Drive fault active 0 Closed
52.4 OFF2 active 1 Closed
52.5 OFF3 active 1 Closed
52.6 Switch on inhibit active 0 Closed
52.7 Drive warning active 0 Closed
52.8 Deviation setpoint/actual value 1 Closed
52.9 PZD control (Process Data Control) 0 Closed
52.A Maximum frequency reached 0 Closed
52.B Warning: Motor current limit 1 Closed
52.C Motor holding brake (MHB) active 0 Closed
52.D Motor overload 1 Closed
52.E Motor running direction right 0 Closed
52.F Inverter overload 1 Closed
53.0 DC brake active 0 Closed
53.1 Act. freq. f_act > P2167 (f_off) 0 Closed
53.2 Act. freq. f_act <= P1080 (f_min) 0 Closed
53.3 Act. current r0027 > P2170 0 Closed
53.4 Act. freq. f_act > P2155 (f_1) 0 Closed
53.5 Act. freq. f_act <= P2155 (f_1) 0 Closed
53.6 Act. freq. f_act >= setpoint 0 Closed
53.7 Act. Vdc r0026 < P2172 0 Closed
53.8 Act. Vdc r0026 > P2172 0 Closed
53.A PID output r2294 == P2292 (PID_min) 0 Closed
53.B PID output r2294 == P2291 (PID_max) 0 Closed
Details:
Display functions ==> see parameter r0052, r0053
Motor holding brake ==> see parameter P1215
DC brake ==> see parameter P1232, P1233
r0747 CO/BO: State of digital outputs Min: - Level

P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays status of digital outputs (also includes inversion of digital outputs via P0748).
Bitfields:
Bit00 Digital output 1 energized 0 NO 1 YES
Dependency:
Bit 0 = 0 :
Relay de-energized / contacts open

Bit 0 = 1 :
Relay energized / contacts closed
P0748 Invert digital outputs Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
1
3
Defines high and low states of relay for a given function.
Bitfields:
Bit00 Invert digital output 1 0 NO 1 YES

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

52 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

3.8 Analog inputs

r0750 Number of ADCs Min: - Level

P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays number of analog inputs available.
r0751 CO/BO: Status word of ADC Min: - Level

P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays status of analog input.
Bitfields:
Bit00 Signal lost on ADC 1 0 NO 1 YES
Dependency:
The following limitations/secondary conditions apply for the wire breakage monitoring:
- For P0756, the monitoring must be activated
- Width of the ADC deadzone P0761 > 0
- Wire breakage / signal loss F0080 is detected if the ADC input quantity is less than 0.5 * P0761.

Analog input
V

10

P0761
0,5 ⋅ P0761
0 t
Signal loss
1
r0751
0 t
P0762 Fault acknowl.
1
F0080
0 t
Act. ADC after scaling
r0755

0 t

r0752 Act. input of ADC [V] Min: - Level

P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: Float Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays smoothed analog input value in volts before the characteristic block.

ADC channel r0754 P1000

P0756 P0753 P0761
Setpoint
KL ADC
ADC+ A ADC ADC dead r0755 Pxxxx
KL type scaling
ADC D zone

r0752
P0756 P0761 P0762

T 0
Wire F0080
breakage
sensing r0751
r0751
1.7 V r0722
1
r0722.3 Pxxxx
0 P0704
3.9 V

Function

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 53
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P0753 Smooth time ADC Min: 0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: ms
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
3
10000
3
Defines filter time (PT1 filter) in [ms] for analog input.
Note:
Increasing this time (smooth) reduces jitter but slows down response to the analog input.

P0753 = 0 : No filtering
r0754 Act. ADC value after scaling [%] Min: - Level

P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Shows smoothed value of analog input in [%] after scaling block.
Dependency:
P0757 to P0760 define range (ADC scaling).
r0755 CO: Act. ADC after scal. [4000h] Min: - Level

P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: I16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays analog input, scaled using ASPmin and ASPmax.

Analog setpoint (ASP) from the analog scaling block can vary from min. analog setpoint (ASPmin) to a max.
analog setpoint (ASPmax) as shown in P0757 (ADC scaling).

The largest magnitude (value without sign) of ASPmin and ASPmax defines the scaling of 16384.

By associating parameter r0755 with an internal value (e.g. frequency setpoint), a scaled value is calculated
internally by the MM4. The frequency value is calculated using the following equation:

ASPmax
ADC
V
10 V
ASPmin

r0755 [Hex] r0755 [Hz]

r0755 [Hex] max ( ASP max , ASP min )

r0755 [Hz] = ⋅ P2000 ⋅
4000 [Hex] 100%
Example:
Case a:
- ASPmin = 300 %, ASPmax = 100 % then 16384 represents 300 %.
- This parameter will vary from 5461 to 16384.

Case b:
- ASPmin = -200 %, ASPmax = 100 % then 16384 represents 200 %.
- This parameter will vary from -16384 to +8192.

4000 h = max( ASPmax , ASPmin )

% %
ASPmax 4000 h 16384 dez
300 %
300 % a

ASPmin ASPmax
100 % 100 %
0 V 0 V
10 V 10 V
b

-200 % ASPmin
-200 % 7FFF h -16383 dez
Note:
- This value is used as an input to analog BICO connectors.
- ASPmax represents the highest analog setpoint (this may be at 10 V).
- ASPmin represents the lowest analog setpoint (this may be at 0 V).
Details:
See parameters P0757 to P0760 (ADC scaling)

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

54 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P0756 Type of ADC Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
1
2
Defines type of analog input and also enables analog input monitoring.
Possible Settings:
0 Unipolar voltage input (0 to +10 V)
1 Unipolar voltage input with monitoring (0 to 10 V)
Notice:
When monitoring is enabled and a deadband defined (P0761), a fault condition will be generated (F0080) if
the analog input voltage falls below 50 % of the deadband voltage.
Details:
See P0757 to P0760 (ADC scaling).
P0757 Value x1 of ADC scaling [V] Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: V
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 10
0 2
Parameters P0757 - P0760 configure the input scaling as shown in the diagram:

P0761 = 0
%
100 %

4000 h
ASPmax

P0760

P0757

V
10 V x100%
P0759

P0758

ASPmin

Where:
- Analog setpoints represent a [%] of the normalized frequency in P2000.
- Analog setpoints may be larger than 100 %.
- ASPmax represents highest analog setpoint (this may be at 10 V).
- ASPmin represents lowest analog setpoint (this may be at 0 V).
- Default values provide a scaling of 0 V = 0 %, and 10 V = 100 %.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 55
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

Note:
The ADC-linear characteristic is described by 4 coordinates, based on a two-point equation:

y - P0758 P0760 − P0758

=
x - P0757 P0759 − P0757

For calculations the point-gradient form (offset and gradient) is more advantageous:

y = m ⋅ x + y0

The transformation between these two forms is given by:

P0760 − P0758 P0758 ⋅ P0759 − P0757 ⋅ P0760

m= y0 =
P0759 − P0757 P0759 − P0757

For scaling of the input the value of y_max and x_min has to be determined. This is done by the following
equations:

P0760 ⋅ P0757 − P0758 ⋅ P0759

xmin =
P0760 − P0758

P0760 − P0758
y max = ( x max − x min) ⋅
P0759 − P0757

Notice:
The value x2 of ADC scaling P0759 must be greater than the value x1 of ADC scaling P0757.
P0758 Value y1 of ADC scaling Min: -99999.9 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.0
99999.9
2
Sets value of Y1 in [%] as described in P0757 (ADC scaling)
Dependency:
Affects P2000 to 2002 (reference frequency, voltage, current) depending on which setpoint is to be
generated.
P0759 Value x2 of ADC scaling [V] Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: V
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
10
10
2
Sets value of X2 as described in P0757 (ADC scaling).
Notice:
The value x2 of ADC scaling P0759 must be greater than the value x1 of ADC scaling P0757.
P0760 Value y2 of ADC scaling Min: -99999.9 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
100.0
99999.9
2
Sets value of Y2 in [%] as described in P0757 (ADC scaling).
Dependency:
Affects P2000 to 2002 (reference frequency, voltage, current) depending on which setpoint is to be
generated.
P0761 Width of ADC deadband [V] Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: V
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
10
2
Defines width of deadband on analog input. The diagrams below explain its use.
Example:
The below example produces a 2 to 10 V analog input 0 to 50 Hz (ADC value 2 to 10 V, 0 to 50 Hz):

- P2000 = 50 Hz
- P0759 = 8 V P0760 = 75 %
- P0757 = 2 V P0758 = 0 %
- P0761 = 2 V
- P0756 = 0 or 1

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

56 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P0761 > 0 and (0 < P0758 < P0760 or 0 > P0758 > P0760)
%
100 %

4000 h
ASPmax

P0760

P0757 > P0761

P0758 V
10 V x100%
P0757 P0759
P0761
P0757 = P0761
P0757 < P0761
ASPmin

The below example produces a 0 to 10 V analog input (-50 to +50 Hz) with center zero and a "holding point"
0.2 V wide (0.1 V to each side of center, ADC value 0 to 10 V, -50 to +50 Hz):

- P2000 = 50 Hz
- P0759 = 8 V P0760 = 75 %
- P0757 = 2 V P0758 = -75 %
- P0761 = 0.1 V
- P0756 = 0 or 1

P0761 > 0 and P0758 < 0 < P0760

%
100 %

4000 h
ASPmax

P0760

P0757

V
10 V x100%
P0759
P0761
P0758

ASPmin

Note:
P0761[x] = 0 : No deadband active.

Deadband starts from 0 V to value of P0761, if both values of P0758 and P0760 (y coordinates of ADC
scaling) are positive or negative respectively. However, deadband is active in both directions from point of
intersection (x axis with ADC scaling curve), if sign of P0758 and P0760 are opposite.

Min. frequency P1080 should be zero when using center zero setup. There is no hysteresis at the end of the
deadband.
P0762 Delay for loss of signal action Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: ms
QuickComm.: No
Def: 10
Max: 10000
3
Defines time delay between loss of analog setpoint and appearance of fault code F0080.
Note:
Expert users can choose the desired reaction to F0080 (default is OFF2).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 57
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

3.9 Analog outputs

r0770 Number of DACs Min: - Level

P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays number of analog outputs available.
P0771 CI: DAC Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
21:0
4000:0
2
Defines function of the 0 - 20 mA analog output.
Common Settings:
21 CO: Act. frequency (scaled to P2000)
24 CO: Act. output frequency (scaled to P2000)
25 CO: Act. output voltage (scaled to P2001)
26 CO: Act. filtered DC-link volt. (scaled to P2001)
27 CO: Act. output current (scaled to P2002)

P0777
P0778
P0779
P0780
P0773 Smooth time DAC Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: ms
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
2
1000
2
Defines smoothing time [ms] for analog output signal. This parameter enables smoothing for DAC using a
PT1 filter.
Dependency:
P0773 = 0: Deactivates filter.
r0774 Act. DAC value [mA] Min: - Level

P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: Float Unit: - Def:
Max: -
- 2
Shows value of analog output in [mA] after filtering and scaling.
P0775 Permit absolute value Min: 0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
1
2
Decides if the absolute value of the analog output is used. If enabled, this parameter will take the absolute
value of the value to be outputed. If the value was originally negative then the corresponding bit in r0785 is
set, otherwise it is cleared.
Possible Settings:
0 OFF
1 ON
P0776 Type of DAC Min: 0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 0
0 2
Defines type of analog output.
Possible Settings:
0 Current output
Note:
The analog output is designed as a current output with a range of 0...20 mA.

For a voltage output with a range of 0...10 V an external resistor of 500 Ohms has to be connected at the
terminals (12/13).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

58 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P0777 Value x1 of DAC scaling Min: -99999.0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.0
99999.0
2
Defines x1 output characteristic in [%]. Scaling block is responsible for adjustment of output value defined in
P0771 (DAC connector input).

Parameters of DAC scaling block (P0777 ... P0781) work as follows:

Where:
Points P1 (x1, y1) and P2 (x2, y2) can be chosen freely.
Example:
The default values of the scaling block provides a scaling of:
P1: 0.0 % = 0 mA
P2: 100.0 % = 20 mA
Dependency:
Affects P2000 to P2002 (referency frequency, voltage, current) depending on which setpoint is to be
generated.
Note:
The DAC-linear characteristic is described by 4 coordinates, based on a two-point equation:

y - P0778 P0780 − P0778

=
x - P0777 P0779 − P0777

For calculations the point-gradient form (offset and gradient) is more advantageous:

y = m ⋅ x + y0

The transformation between these two forms is given by:

P0780 − P0778 P0778 ⋅ P0779 − P0777 ⋅ P0780

m= y0 = ≤ 200 %
P0779 − P0777 P0779 − P0777

For scaling of the input the value of y_max and x_min has to be determined. This is done by the following
equations:

P0780 ⋅ P0777 − P0778 ⋅ P0779

xmin =
P0780 − P0778

P0780 − P0778
y max = ( x max − x min) ⋅
P0779 − P0777

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 59
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P0778 Value y1 of DAC scaling Min: 0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
20
2
Defines y1 of output characteristic.
P0779 Value x2 of DAC scaling Min: -99999.0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
100.0
99999.0
2
Defines x2 of output characteristic in [%].
Dependency:
Affects P2000 to P2002 (referency frequency, voltage, current) depending on which setpoint is to be
generated.
P0780 Value y2 of DAC scaling Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
20
20
2
Defines y2 of output characteristic.
P0781 Width of DAC deadband Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
20
2
Sets width of dead-band in [mA] for analog output.

r0785 CO/BO: Status word of DAC Min: - Level

P-Group: TERMINAL
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays status of analog output. Bit 0 indicates that the value of analog output 1 is negative.
Bitfields:
Bit00 Analog output 1 -ve 0 NO 1 YES

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

60 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

3.10 BICO command parameters

P0800 BI: Download parameter set 0 Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
3
Defines source of command to start download of parameter set 0 from attached AOP.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
Dependency:
1. The parameter set 0 can only be downloaded in conjunction with the AOP
2. Establish communications between the frequency inverter and AOP
3. The frequency inverter must be selected using the AOP if the AOP is connected at the COM link
interface (RS485)
4. Select the frequency inverter state "Ready" (r0002 = 1)
5. Signal from P0800:
0 = Do not download.
1 = Start to download parameter set 0 from the AOP.

Inverter AOP
BI: Dwnl.par.set 0
P0800.C
(0:0) Parameter set 0
BOP link Parameter set 1
or
..
r0002 = 1 .
"Drive ready" COM link Parameter set 9

Transmission of "Parameter set 0" from AOP to inverter

P0801 BI: Download parameter set 1 Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
3
Defines sources of command to start download of parameter set 1 from attached AOP.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
Note:
See parameter P0800
P0810 BI: CDS bit 0 (Local / Remote) Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4095:0
2
Selects command source from which to read Bit 0 for selecting a command data set (CDS).

Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 61
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P0840 BI: ON/OFF1 Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
722:0
4000:0
3
Allows ON/OFF1 command source to be selected using BICO.

The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source; the last digit denotes the bit
setting for that parameter. The default setting (ON right) is digital input 1 (722.0). Alternative source possible
only when function of digital input 1 is changed (via P0701) before changing value of P0840.

f2

0
f2
t down,OFF1 = P1121 ⋅
P1082

Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)
19.0 = ON/OFF1 via BOP
Dependency:
Active only when P0719 < 10. See parameter P0719 (Selection of command/setpoint source).
Note:
- OFF1 means a ramp stop down to 0 using P1121.
- OFF1 is low active.
- For the priority of all soft commands, the following applies: OFF2, OFF3, OFF1
P0842 BI: ON reverse/OFF1 Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
3
Allows ON/OFF1 reverse command source to be selected using BICO.

Normally in this case at a positive frequency setpoint, it is getting approached ccw (negative frequency
setpoint) The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source and the last digit
denotes the bit setting for that parameter.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)
19.0 = ON/OFF1 via BOP
Details:
See parameter P0840.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

62 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P0844 BI: 1. OFF2 Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1:0
4000:0
3
Defines first source of OFF2.

The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source and the last digit denotes the
bit setting for that parameter. If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF2, the inverter will not run unless
the digital input is active.

Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)
19.0 = ON/OFF1 via BOP
19.1 = OFF2: Electrical stop via BOP
Dependency:
Active only when P0719 < 10. See parameter P0719 (Selection of command/setpoint source).
Note:
- OFF2 means an immediate pulse inhibit; the motor coasts down.
- OFF2 is low active.
- The following applies for the priority of all of the OFF commands: OFF2, OFF3, OFF1
P0845 BI: 2. OFF2 Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
19:1
4000:0
3
Defines second source of OFF2.

The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source and the last digit denotes the
bit setting for that parameter. If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF2, the inverter will not run unless
the digital input is active.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)
19.0 = ON/OFF1 via BOP
Details:
See parameter P0844.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 63
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P0848 BI: 1. OFF3 Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1:0
4000:0
3
Defines first source of OFF3.

The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source and the last digit denotes the
bit setting for that parameter. If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF3, the inverter will not run unless
the digital input is active.

OFF3
t
f

f max f act,motor

(P1082)

f2
P2168 f act,inverter

P2167

0 t
P2168 f2
tdown,OFF3 t down,OFF3 = P1135 ⋅
P1082
P1135
r0052 Bit02
Operation
Pulse
cancellation t
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)
19.0 = ON/OFF1 via BOP
Dependency:
Active only when P0719 < 10. See parameter P0719 (Selection of command/setpoint source).
Note:
- OFF3 means fast ramp-down to 0 Hz through P1135.
- OFF3 is low-active.
- Priority of all OFF commands: OFF2, OFF3, OFF1
P0849 BI: 2. OFF3 Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1:0
4000:0
3
Defines second source of OFF3.

The first three digits describe the parameter number of the command source and the last digit denotes the
bit setting for that parameter. If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF3, the inverter will not run unless
the digital input is active.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)
19.0 = ON/OFF1 via BOP
Dependency:
In contrast to P0848 (first source of OFF3), this parameter is always active, independent of P0719 (selection
of command and frequency setpoint).
Details:
See parameter P0848.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

64 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P0852 BI: Pulse enabling Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1:0
4000:0
3
Defines source of pulse enable/disable signal.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)
Dependency:
Active only when P0719 < 10. See parameter P0719 (Selection of command/setpoint source).

3.11 Communication parameters

P0918 CB address Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
3
65535
2
Defines address of CB (communication board) or address of the other option modules.

There are two ways to set the bus address:

- via DIP switches on the PROFIBUS module
- via a user-entered value
Note:
Possible PROFIBUS settings:
- 1 ... 125
- 0, 126, 127 are not allowed

The following applies when a PROFIBUS module is used:

- DIP switch = 0 Address defined in P0918 (CB address) is valid
- DIP switch not = 0 DIP switch setting has priority and P0918 indicates DIP switch setting.
P0927 Parameter changeable via Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
15
15
2
Specifies the interfaces which can be used to change parameters.

This parameter allows the user to easily protect the inverter from unauthorized modification of parameters.
Annotation: Parameter P0927 is not password protected.
Bitfields:
Bit00 PROFIBUS / CB 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 BOP 0 NO 1 YES
Bit02 USS on BOP link 0 NO 1 YES
Bit03 USS on COM link 0 NO 1 YES
Example:
Bits 0, 1, 2 and 3 set:
The default setting allows parameters to be changed via any interface. If all bits are set, the parameter is
displayed on BOP as follows:

Bits 0, 1, 2 and 3 reset:

This setting allows no parameters to be modified via any interface with the exception of P0003 and P0927. If
all bits are reset, the parameter is displayed on BOP as follows:

Details:
The seven-segment display is explained in the "Introduction to MICROMASTER System Parameters" in this
handbook.
r0947[8] CO: Last fault code Min: - Level

P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max: -
- 2
Displays fault history according to the diagram below

where:
- "F1" is the first active fault (not yet acknowledged).
- "F2" is the second active fault (not yet acknowledged).
- "F1e" is the occurrence of the fault acknowledgement for F1 & F2.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 65
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

This moves the value in the 2 indices down to the next pair of indices, where they are stored. Indices 0 & 1
contain the active faults. When faults are acknowledged, indices 0 & 1 are reset to 0.

r0947[0] F1 Active
r0947[1] F2 Fault Codes
F1e
F1e
r0947[2] Most recent
r0947[3] Fault Codes - 1
F1e
F1e
r0947[4] Most recent
r0947[5] Fault Codes - 2
F1e
F1e
r0947[6] Most recent
r0947[7] Fault Codes - 3
Index:
r0947[0] : Recent fault trip --, fault 1
r0947[1] : Recent fault trip --, fault 2
r0947[2] : Recent fault trip -1, fault 3
r0947[3] : Recent fault trip -1, fault 4
r0947[4] : Recent fault trip -2, fault 5
r0947[5] : Recent fault trip -2, fault 6
r0947[6] : Recent fault trip -3, fault 7
r0947[7] : Recent fault trip -3, fault 8
Example:
If the inverter trips on undervoltage and then receives an external trip before the undervoltage is
acknowledged, you will obtain:
- r0947[0] = 3 Undervoltage (F0003)
- r0947[1] = 85 External trip (F0085)

Whenever a fault in index 0 is acknowledged (F1e), the fault history shifts as indicated in the diagram
above.
Dependency:
Index 1 used only if second fault occurs before first fault is acknowledged.
Details:
See "Faults and Warnings"

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

66 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

r0948[12] CO: Fault time Min: - Level

P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Time stamp to indicate when the fault has occurred.
Index:
r0948[0] : Recent fault trip --, time stamp
r0948[1] : Recent fault trip --, time stamp
r0948[2] : Recent fault trip --, time stamp
r0948[3] : Recent fault trip -1, time stamp
r0948[4] : Recent fault trip -1, time stamp
r0948[5] : Recent fault trip -1, time stamp
r0948[6] : Recent fault trip -2, time stamp
r0948[7] : Recent fault trip -2, time stamp
r0948[8] : Recent fault trip -2, time stamp
r0948[9] : Recent fault trip -3, time stamp
r0948[10] : Recent fault trip -3, time stamp
r0948[11] : Recent fault trip -3, time stamp
Details:
Parameter r2114 (runtime counter) is a possible source of the time stamp. When using the runtime counter,
the time is entered into the first two indices of the fault trip (shutdown) essentially the same as for r2114.

Time stamp when using r2114 (Refer to parameter r2114):

r0948[0] : Last fault trip --, system time, seconds, upper word
r0948[1] : Last fault trip --, system time, seconds, lower word
r0948[2] : 0
r0948[3] : Last fault trip --, system time, seconds, upper word
r0948[4] : Last fault trip --, system time, seconds, lower word
r0948[5] : 0
r0948[6] : Last fault trip --, system time, seconds, upper word
r0948[7] : Last fault trip --, system time, seconds, lower word
r0948[8] : 0
r0948[9] : Last fault trip --, system time, seconds, upper word
r0948[10] : Last fault trip --, system time, seconds, lower word
r0948[11] : 0

Parameter P2115 (AOP real-time clock) is an additional possible source of the time stamp. When using the
real-time counter, instead of the system runtime r2114[0] and r2114[1], the value of the real-time clock
P2115[0] to P2115[2] is read-in.

If the contents of parameter P2115 = 0, then the system assumes that there was no synchronization with
the real time. In this case, if there is a fault, values are transferred from parameter r2114 into parameter
P0948. If the contents of parameter P2115 are not equal to zero, then a synchronization with real time has
taken place. In this case, if there is a fault, the values from parameter P2115 are transferred into parameter
P0948.

Time stamp when using P2115 (Refer to parameter P2115 (AOP real-time clock)):
r0948[0] : Last fault trip --, fault time, seconds + minutes
r0948[1] : Last fault trip --, fault time, hours + days
r0948[2] : Last fault trip --, fault time, month + year
r0948[3] : Last fault trip -1, fault time, seconds + minutes
r0948[4] : Last fault trip -1, fault time, hours + days
r0948[5] : Last fault trip -1, fault time, month + year
r0948[6] : Last fault trip -2, fault time, seconds + minutes
r0948[7] : Last fault trip -2, fault time, hours + days
r0948[8] : Last fault trip -2, fault time, month + year
r0948[9] : Last fault trip -3, fault time, seconds + minutes
r0948[10] : Last fault trip -3, fault time, hours + days
r0948[11] : Last fault trip -3, fault time, month + year

r0949[8] CO: Fault value Min: - Level

P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays drive fault values. It is for service purposes and indicate the type of fault reported. The values are
listed in the code where faults are reported.
Index:
r0949[0] : Recent fault trip --, fault value 1
r0949[1] : Recent fault trip --, fault value 2
r0949[2] : Recent fault trip -1, fault value 3
r0949[3] : Recent fault trip -1, fault value 4
r0949[4] : Recent fault trip -2, fault value 5
r0949[5] : Recent fault trip -2, fault value 6
r0949[6] : Recent fault trip -3, fault value 7
r0949[7] : Recent fault trip -3, fault value 8

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 67
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P0952 Total number of faults Min: 0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
8
3
Displays number of faults stored in r0947 (last fault code).
Dependency:
Setting 0 resets fault history. (changing to 0 also resets parameter r0948 - fault time).
r0964[5] Firmware version data Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Firmware version data.
Index:
r0964[0] : Company (Siemens = 42)
r0964[1] : Product type
r0964[2] : Firmware version
r0964[3] : Firmware date (year)
r0964[4] : Firmware date (day/month)
Example:
No. Value Meaning
r0964[0] 42 SIEMENS
r0964[1] 1001 MICROMASTER 420
1002 MICROMASTER 440
1003 MICRO- / COMBIMASTER 411
1004 MICROMASTER 410
1005 reserved
1006 MICROMASTER 440 PX
1007 MICROMASTER 430
r0964[2] 105 Firmware V1.05
r0964[3] 2001
27.10.2001
r0964[4] 2710

r0965 Profibus profile Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Identification of profile number and version for PROFIDrive.
r0967 Control word 1 Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays control word 1.
Bitfields:
Bit00 ON/OFF1 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 OFF2: Electrical stop 0 YES 1 NO
Bit02 OFF3: Fast stop 0 YES 1 NO
Bit03 Pulses enabled 0 NO 1 YES

Bit04 RFG enable 0 NO 1 YES

Bit05 RFG start 0 NO 1 YES
Bit06 Setpoint enable 0 NO 1 YES
Bit07 Fault acknowledge 0 NO 1 YES

Bit08 JOG right 0 NO 1 YES

Bit09 JOG left 0 NO 1 YES
Bit10 Control from PLC 0 NO 1 YES
Bit11 Reverse (setpoint inversion) 0 NO 1 YES

Bit13 Motor potentiometer MOP up 0 NO 1 YES

Bit14 Motor potentiometer MOP down 0 NO 1 YES
Bit15 Local / Remote 0 NO 1 YES

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

68 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

r0968 Status word 1 Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays active status word of inverter (in binary) and can be used to diagnose which commands are active.
Bitfields:
Bit00 Drive ready 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 Drive ready to run 0 NO 1 YES
Bit02 Drive running 0 NO 1 YES
Bit03 Drive fault active 0 NO 1 YES

Bit04 OFF2 active 0 YES 1 NO

Bit05 OFF3 active 0 YES 1 NO
Bit06 ON inhibit active 0 NO 1 YES
Bit07 Drive warning active 0 NO 1 YES

Bit08 Deviation setpoint / act. value 0 YES 1 NO

Bit09 PZD control 0 NO 1 YES
Bit10 Maximum frequency reached 0 NO 1 YES
Bit11 Warning: Motor current limit 0 YES 1 NO

Bit12 Motor holding brake active 0 NO 1 YES

Bit13 Motor overload 0 YES 1 NO
Bit14 Motor runs right 0 NO 1 YES
Bit15 Inverter overload 0 YES 1 NO
P0970 Factory reset Min: 0 Level
CStat: C
P-Group: PAR_RESET
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
1
1
P0970 = 1 resets all parameters to their default values.
Possible Settings:
0 Disabled
1 Parameter reset
Dependency:
- First set P0010 = 30 (factory settings).
- Stop drive (i.e. disable all pulses) before you can reset parameters to default values.
Note:
The following parameters retain their values after a factory reset:

- P0014 Store mode

- r0039 CO: Energy consumption meter [kWh]
- P0100 Europe / North America
- P0918 CB address
- P2010 USS baud rate
- P2011 USS address
P0971 Transfer data from RAM to EEPROM Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
1
3
Transfers values from RAM to EEPROM when set to 1.
Possible Settings:
0 Disabled
1 Start transfer
Note:
All values in RAM are transferred to EEPROM.

Parameter is automatically reset to 0 (default) after successful transfer.

The storage from RAM to EEPROM is accomplished via P0971. The communications are reset, if the
transfer was successful. During the reset process communications will be interrupted. This creates the
following conditions:
- PLC (e.g. SIMATIC S7) enters Stop mode
- Starter automatically recovers communications once they are re-established.
- Drivemonitor is displayed "NC" (not connected) in the status line or "drive busy".
- BOP displays "busy"

After completion of the transfer process, the communication between the inverter and the PC-tools (e.g.
Starter) or BOP is automatically re-established.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 69
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

3.12 Setpoint source

P1000 Selection of frequency setpoint Min: 0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
2
66
1
Selects frequency setpoint source.
The selection of settings is detailed in the following table of possible settings, in which the Main setpoint is
given by the least significant digit (right-hand position) and the Additional setpoint is given by the most
significant digit (left-hand position).
Possible Settings:
0 No main setpoint
1 MOP setpoint
2 Analog setpoint
3 Fixed frequency
4 USS on BOP link
5 USS on COM link
6 CB on COM link
10 No main setpoint + MOP setpoint
11 MOP setpoint + MOP setpoint
12 Analog setpoint + MOP setpoint
13 Fixed frequency + MOP setpoint
14 USS on BOP link + MOP setpoint
15 USS on COM link + MOP setpoint
16 CB on COM link + MOP setpoint
20 No main setpoint + Analog setpoint
21 MOP setpoint + Analog setpoint
22 Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint
23 Fixed frequency + Analog setpoint
24 USS on BOP link + Analog setpoint
25 USS on COM link + Analog setpoint
26 CB on COM link + Analog setpoint
30 No main setpoint + Fixed frequency
31 MOP setpoint + Fixed frequency
32 Analog setpoint + Fixed frequency
33 Fixed frequency + Fixed frequency
34 USS on BOP link + Fixed frequency
35 USS on COM link + Fixed frequency
36 CB on COM link + Fixed frequency
40 No main setpoint + USS on BOP link
41 MOP setpoint + USS on BOP link
42 Analog setpoint + USS on BOP link
43 Fixed frequency + USS on BOP link
44 USS on BOP link + USS on BOP link
45 USS on COM link + USS on BOP link
46 CB on COM link + USS on BOP link
50 No main setpoint + USS on COM link
51 MOP setpoint + USS on COM link
52 Analog setpoint + USS on COM link
53 Fixed frequency + USS on COM link
54 USS on BOP link + USS on COM link
55 USS on COM link + USS on COM link
60 No main setpoint + CB on COM link
61 MOP setpoint + CB on COM link
62 Analog setpoint + CB on COM link
63 Fixed frequency + CB on COM link
64 USS on BOP link + CB on COM link
66 CB on COM link + CB on COM link
Example:
Setting 12 selects main setpoint (2) derived from analog input with additional setpoint (1) taken from the
motor potentiometer.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

70 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

Caution:
Be aware, by changing of parameter P1000 all BICO parameters (see table below) are modified.
Note:
Single digits denote main setpoints that have no additional setpoint.

Changing this parameter sets (to default) all settings on item selected (see table).

P1000 = xy
y=0 y=1 y=2 y=3 y=4 y=5 y=6
0.0 1050.0 755.0 1024.0 2015.1 2018.1 2050.1 P1070
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 P1071
x=0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 P1075
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 P1076
0.0 1050.0 755.0 1024.0 2015.1 2018.1 2050.1 P1070
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 P1071
x=1
1050.0 1050.0 1050.0 1050.0 1050.0 1050.0 1050.0 P1075
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 P1076
0.0 1050.0 755.0 1024.0 2015.1 2018.1 2050.1 P1070
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 P1071
x=2
755.0 755.0 755.0 755.0 755.0 755.0 755.0 P1075
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 P1076
0.0 1050.0 755.0 1024.0 2015.1 2018.1 2050.1 P1070
P1000 = xy

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 P1071

x=3
1024.0 1024.0 1024.0 1024.0 1024.0 1024.0 1024.0 P1075
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 P1076
0.0 1050.0 755.0 1024.0 2015.1 2018.1 2050.1 P1070
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 P1071
x=4
2015.1 2015.1 2015.1 2015.1 2015.1 2015.1 2015.1 P1075
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 P1076
0.0 1050.0 755.0 1024.0 2015.1 2018.1 P1070
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 P1071
x=5
2018.1 2018.1 2018.1 2018.1 2018.1 2018.1 P1075
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 P1076
0.0 1050.0 755.0 1024.0 2015.1 2050.1 P1070
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 P1071
x=6
2050.1 2050.1 2050.1 2050.1 2050.1 2050.1 P1075
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 P1076

Example:
P1000 = 21 P1070 = 1050.0
P1071 = 1.0
P1075 = 755.0
P1076 = 1.0

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 71
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

3.13 Fixed frequencies

P1001 Fixed frequency 1 Min: -650.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.00
650.00
2
Defines fixed frequency setpoint 1.

There are three options available for selection of the fixed frequencies:
1. Direct selection
2. Direct selection + ON command
3. Binary coded selection + ON command

1. Direct selection (P0701 - P0703 = 15):

- In this mode of operation 1 digital input selects 1 fixed frequency.
- If several inputs are active together, the selected frequencies are summed.
- E.g.: FF1 + FF2 + FF3.

2. Direct selection + ON command (P0701 - P0703 = 16):

- The fixed frequency selection combines the fixed frequencies with an ON command.
- In this mode of operation 1 digital input selects 1 fixed frequency.
- If several inputs are active together, the selected frequencies are summed.
- E.g.: FF1 + FF2 + FF3.

3. Binary coded selection + ON command (P0701 - P0703 = 17):

- Up to 7 fixed frequencies can be selected using this method.
- The fixed frequencies are selected according to the following table:
Example:
Binary coded selection :

DIN3 DIN2 DIN1

0 Hz FF0 0 0 0
P1001 FF1 0 0 1
P1002 FF2 0 1 0
P1003 FF3 0 1 1
P1004 FF4 1 0 0
P1005 FF5 1 0 1
P1006 FF6 1 1 0
P1007 FF7 1 1 1

Direct selection of FF P1001 via DIN 1:

....

...

Dependency:
Select fixed frequency operation (using P1000).

Inverter requires ON command to start in the case of direct selection (P0701 - P0703 = 15).
Note:
Fixed frequencies can be selected using the digital inputs, and can also be combined with an ON command.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

72 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P1002 Fixed frequency 2 Min: -650.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
5.00
650.00
2
Defines fixed frequency setpoint 2.
Details:
See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).
P1003 Fixed frequency 3 Min: -650.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
10.00
650.00
2
Defines fixed frequency setpoint 3.
Details:
See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).
P1004 Fixed frequency 4 Min: -650.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
15.00
650.00
2
Defines fixed frequency setpoint 4.
Details:
See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).
P1005 Fixed frequency 5 Min: -650.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
20.00
650.00
2
Defines fixed frequency setpoint 5.
Details:
See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).
P1006 Fixed frequency 6 Min: -650.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
25.00
650.00
2
Defines fixed frequency setpoint 6.
Details:
See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).
P1007 Fixed frequency 7 Min: -650.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
30.00
650.00
2
Defines fixed frequency setpoint 7.
Details:
See parameter P1001 (fixed frequency 1).
P1016 Fixed frequency mode - Bit 0 Min: 1 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1
3
3
Fixed frequencies can be selected in three different modes. Parameter P1016 defines the mode of selection
Bit 0.
Possible Settings:
1 Direct selection
2 Direct selection + ON command
3 Binary coded selection + ON command
Details:
See table in P1001 (fixed frequency 1) for description of how to use fixed frequencies.
P1017 Fixed frequency mode - Bit 1 Min: 1 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 3
1 3
Fixed frequencies can be selected in three different modes. Parameter P1017 defines the mode of selection
Bit 1.
Possible Settings:
1 Direct selection
2 Direct selection + ON command
3 Binary coded selection + ON command
Details:
See table in P1001 (fixed frequency 1) for description of how to use fixed frequencies.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 73
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P1018 Fixed frequency mode - Bit 2 Min: 1 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1
3
3
Fixed frequencies can be selected in three different modes. Parameter P1018 defines the mode of selection
Bit 2.
Possible Settings:
1 Direct selection
2 Direct selection + ON command
3 Binary coded selection + ON command
Details:
See table in P1001 (fixed frequency 1) for description of how to use fixed frequencies.
P1020 BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 0 Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def: 0:0
Max: 4000:0
3
Defines origin of fixed frequency selection.
Common Settings:
P1020 = 722.0 ==> Digital input 1
P1021 = 722.1 ==> Digital input 2
P1022 = 722.2 ==> Digital input 3
Dependency:
Accessible only if P0701 - P0703 = 99 (function of digital inputs = BICO)
P1021 BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 1 Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
3
Defines origin of fixed frequency selection.
Dependency:
Accessible only if P0701 - P0703 = 99 (function of digital inputs = BICO)
Details:
See P1020 (fixed frequency selection Bit 0) for most common settings
P1022 BI: Fixed freq. selection Bit 2 Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
3
Defines origin of fixed frequency selection.
Dependency:
Accessible only if P0701 - P0703 = 99 (function of digital inputs = BICO)
Details:
See P1020 (fixed frequency selection Bit 0) for most common settings
r1024 CO: Act. fixed frequency Min: - Level

P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float Unit: Hz Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays sum total of selected fixed frequencies.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

74 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

3.14 Motorized potentiometer (MOP)

P1031 Setpoint memory of the MOP Min: 0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
1
2
Saves last motor potentiometer setpoint (MOP) that was active before OFF command or power down.
Possible Settings:
0 MOP setpoint will not be stored
1 MOP setpoint will be stored (P1040 is updated)
Note:
On next ON command, motor potentiometer setpoint will be the saved value in parameter P1040 (setpoint
of the MOP).
P1032 Inhibit negative MOP setpoints Min: 0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 1
1 2
This parameter suppresses negative setpoints of the MOP output r1050.
Possible Settings:
0 Neg. MOP setpoint is allowed
1 Neg. MOP setpoint inhibited
Note:
The reversing functions (e.g. BOP-Reverse button if P0700 = 1) are not affected by the settings of P1032.
Use P1110 to fully prevent change of direction in setpoint channel.
P1035 BI: Enable MOP (UP-command) Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def: 19:13
Max: 4000:0
3
Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint increase frequency.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)
19.D = MOP up via BOP
P1036 BI: Enable MOP (DOWN-command) Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
19:14
4000:0
3
Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint decrease frequency.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)
19.E = MOP down via BOP
P1040 Setpoint of the MOP Min: -650.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
5.00
650.00
2
Determines setpoint for motor potentiometer control (P1000 = 1).
Note:
- If motor potentiometer setpoint is selected either as main setpoint or additional setpoint, the reverse
direction will be inhibited by default of P1032 (inhibit reverse direction of MOP).
- To re-enable reverse direction, set P1032 = 0.
For BOP/AOP control P1040 must be greater than the min. frequency P1080.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 75
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

r1050 CO: Act. Output freq. of the MOP Min: - Level

P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float Unit: Hz Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays output frequency of motor potentiometer setpoint ([Hz]).

1
DIN
P0840 0
t
BOP 1
P1035 0
USS
BOP link t
1
USS
COM link P1036 0
t
CB
COM link f
P1082

P1080

t
P1120 P1121
-P1080
fact
r1050
-P1082

Possible parameter settings for the selection of MOP:

Selection MOP up MOP down

P0719 = 0, P0700 = 2, P1000 = 1 P0702 = 13 P0703 = 14
DIN or
P0719 = 1, P0700 = 2 (DIN2) (DIN3)

P0719 = 0, P0700 = 1, P1000 = 1

or
BOP P0719 = 1, P0700 = 1 UP button DOWN button
or
P0719 = 11
P0719 = 0, P0700 = 4, P1000 = 1
USS on or
BOP link P0719 = 1, P0700 = 4 USS control word USS control word
or r2032 Bit13 r2032 Bit14
(AOP) P0719 = 41
P0719 = 0, P0700 = 5, P1000 = 1
USS on or
COM link P0719 = 1, P0700 = 5 USS control word USS control word
or r2036 Bit13 r2036 Bit14
P0719 = 51
P0719 = 0, P0700 = 6, P1000 = 1
or
CB P0719 = 1, P0700 = 6 CB control word CB control word
or r2090 Bit13 r2090 Bit14
P0719 = 61

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

76 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

3.15 JOG

P1055 BI: Enable JOG right Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
3
Defines source of JOG right.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)
19.8 = JOG right via BOP
Dependency:
Active only when P0719 < 10. See parameter P0719 (Selection of command/setpoint source).
P1056 BI: Enable JOG left Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
3
Defines source of JOG left.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)
19.9 = JOG left via BOP
Dependency:
Active only when P0719 < 10. See parameter P0719 (Selection of command/setpoint source).
P1058 JOG frequency right Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
5.00
650.00
2
Jogging increases the motor frequency by small amounts. The JOG buttons uses a non-latching switch on
one of the digital inputs to control the motor frequency.

If JOG clockwise (jogging clockwise) or JOG counter-clockwise is selected, the speed is increased until the
value, set in P1058 is reached.

A0923 A0923
"1"
DIN JOG right
t
P1055 "0"
(0)
BOP
"1"
USS JOG left
BOP link t
P1056 "0"
USS (0)
COM link f
P1082
CB
COM link P1058

P1059
P1061
P1060

P1060

P1061

-P1082

Dependency:
P1060 and P1061 set up and down ramp times respectively for jogging.
P1059 JOG frequency left Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
5.00
650.00
2
While JOG left is selected, this parameter determines the frequency at which the inverter will run.
Dependency:
P1060 and P1061 set up and down ramp times respectively for jogging.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 77
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P1060 JOG ramp-up time Min: 0.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
10.00
650.00
2
Sets jog ramp-up time. This is the time used while jogging is active.

JOG

f (Hz)

f max
(P1082)

P1058

0
tup t (s)
P1058
P1060 t up = ⋅ P1060
P1082
Notice:
Ramp times will be used as follows:
- P1060 / P1061 : JOG mode is active
- P1120 / P1121 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active
- P1060 / P1061 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P1124 is active
P1061 JOG ramp-down time Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
10.00
650.00
2
Sets ramp-down time. This is the time used while jogging is active.

JOG

f (Hz)

f max
(P1082)

P1058

0
tdown t (s)
P1058
P1061 t down = ⋅ P1061
P1082
Notice:
Ramp times will be used as follows:
- P1060 / P1061 : JOG mode is active
- P1120 / P1121 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active
- P1060 / P1061 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P1124 is active

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

78 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

3.16 Setpoint channel

P1070 CI: Main setpoint Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
755:0
4000:0
3
Defines source of main setpoint.
Common Settings:
755 = Analog input 1 setpoint
1024 = Fixed frequency setpoint
1050 = Motor potentiometer (MOP) setpoint
P1071 CI: Main setpoint scaling Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1:0
4000:0
3
Defines source of the main setpoint scaling.
Common Settings:
755 = Analog input 1 setpoint
1024 = Fixed frequency setpoint
1050 = Motor potentiometer (MOP) setpoint
P1074 BI: Disable additional setpoint Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
3
Disables additional setpoint
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)
P1075 CI: Additional setpoint Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
3
Defines source of the additional setpoint (to be added to main setpoint).
Common Settings:
755 = Analog input 1 setpoint
1024 = Fixed frequency setpoint
1050 = Motor potentiometer (MOP) setpoint
P1076 CI: Additional setpoint scaling Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1:0
4000:0
3
Defines source of scaling for additional setpoint (to be added to main setpoint).
Common Settings:
1 = Scaling of 1.0 (100%)
755 = Analog input 1 Setpoint
1024 = Fixed Frequency Setpoint
1050 = MOP Setpoint
r1078 CO: Total frequency setpoint Min: - Level

P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float Unit: Hz Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays sum of main and additional setpoints in [Hz].
r1079 CO: Selected frequency setpoint Min: - Level

P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float Unit: Hz Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays selected frequency setpoint.

Following frequency setpoints are displayed:

- r1078 Total frequency setpoint
- P1058 JOG frequency right
- P1059 JOG frequency left
Dependency:
P1055 (BI: Enable JOG right) or P1056 (BI: Enable JOG left) define command source of JOG right or JOG
left respectively.
Note:
P1055 = 0 and P1056 = 0 ==> Total frequency setpoint is selected.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 79
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P1080 Min. frequency Min: 0.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
0.00
650.00
1
Sets minimum motor frequency [Hz] at which motor will run irrespective of frequency setpoint.

The minimum frequency P1080 represents a masking frequency of 0 Hz for all frequency target value
sources (e.g. ADC, MOP, FF, USS), with the exception of the JOG target value source (analogous to
P1091). Thus the frequency band +/- P1080 is run through in optimum time by means of the
acceleration/deceleration ramps. Dwelling in the frequency band is not possible (see example).

Furthermore, an undershoot of the actual frequency f_act below min. frequency P1080 is output by the
following signal function.
Example:
ON/OFF

1
0 t
f_set

P1080
t
-P1080
f_act

P1080 + P2150
P1080
t
-P1080
-P1080 - P2150

|f_act| > f_min

r0053 1
Bit 02 0 t
Note:
Value set here is valid both for clockwise and for anticlockwise rotation.

Under certain conditions (e.g. ramping, current limiting), motor can run below minimum frequency.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

80 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P1082 Max. frequency Min: 0.00 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
50.00
650.00
1
Sets maximum motor frequency [Hz] at which motor will run irrespective of the frequency setpoint. The
value set here is valid for both clockwise and anticlockwise rotation.

Futhermore, the monitoring function |f_act| >= P1082 (r0052 Bit10, see example below) is affected by this
parameter.
Example:
f_act

P1082
P1082 - 3 Hz

t
|f_act| P1082 (f_max)

r0052 1
Bit 10 0 t
Dependency:
The maximal value of motor frequency P1082 is limited to pulse frequency P1800. P1082 is dependent on
the derating characteristic as followed:

The maximum output frequency of inverter can be exceeded if one of the following is active:

p1336 r0330
fmax(p1335) = fmax + fslip,max = p1082 + ⋅ ⋅ p0310
100 100

r0330
fmax (p1200) = fmax + 2 ⋅ fslip ,nom = p1082 + 2 ⋅ ⋅ p0310
100
Note:
When using the setpoint source

- Analog Input
- USS
- CB (e.g. PROFIBUS)

The setpoint frequency (in Hz) is cyclically calculated using a percentage value (e.g. for the analog input
r0754) or a hexadecimal value (e.g. for the USS r2018[1]) and the reference frequency P2000.

If for example P1082 = 80 Hz, P2000 = 50 Hz and the analog input is parameterised with P0757 = 0 V,
P0758 = 0 %, P0759 = 10 V, P0760 = 100 %, a setpoint frequency of 50 Hz will be applied at 10 V of the
analog input.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 81
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P1091 Skip frequency 1 Min: 0.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.00
650.00
3
Defines skip frequency 1 which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within
+/- P1101 (skip frequency bandwidth).

Notice:
- Stationary operation is not possible within the suppressed frequency range; the range is merely passed
through (on the ramp).

- For example, if P1091 = 10 Hz and P1101 = 2 Hz, it is not possible to operate continuously between 10
Hz +/- 2 Hz (i.e. between 8 and 12 Hz).
P1092 Skip frequency 2 Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def: 0.00
Max: 650.00
3
Defines skip frequency 2 which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within
+/- P1101 (skip frequency bandwidth).
Details:
See P1091 (skip frequency 1).
P1093 Skip frequency 3 Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def: 0.00
Max: 650.00
3
Defines skip frequency 3 which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within
+/- P1101 (skip frequency bandwidth).
Details:
See P1091 (skip frequency 1).
P1094 Skip frequency 4 Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def: 0.00
Max: 650.00
3
Defines skip frequency 4 which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within
+/- P1101 (skip frequency bandwidth).
Details:
See P1091 (skip frequency 1).
P1101 Skip frequency bandwidth Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def: 2.00
Max: 10.00
3
Delivers frequency bandwidth to be applied to skip frequencies (in [Hz]).
Details:
See P1091 (skip frequency 1).
P1110 BI: Inhibit neg. freq. setpoint Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
3
This parameter suppresses negative setpoints. Therefore, modification of the motor direction is inhibited to
the setpoint channel.
Common Settings:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Notice:
Where
- If a min. frequency (P1080) and a negative setpoint are given, the motor is accelerated by a positive
value in relationship to the min. frequency.
- This function does not disable the "reverse command functions" (e.g. Reverse, ON left); rather, a
reverse command causes motor to run in the positive direction only, as described above.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

82 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P1113 BI: Reverse Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
722:1
4000:0
3
Defines source of reverse command.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
19.B = Reverse via BOP
Dependency:
Active only when P0719 < 10. See parameter P0719 (Selection of command/setpoint source).
Note:
P1113: =: 0 Æ Reverse disabled via AOP/BOP Reverse key.
r1114 CO: Freq. setp. after dir. ctrl. Min: - Level

P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float Unit: Hz Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays setpoint frequency after change of direction.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 83
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

3.17 Ramp-function generator

r1119 CO: Freq. setpoint before RFG Min: - Level

P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float Unit: Hz Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays output frequency after modification by other functions, e.g.:
- P1110 BI: Inhibit neg. freq. setpoint,
- P1091 - P1094 skip frequencies,
- P1080 Min. frequency,
- P1082 Max. frequency,
- limitations,
- etc.
P1120 Ramp-up time Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: s
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
10.00
650.00
1
Time taken for motor to accelerate from standstill up to maximum motor frequency (P1082) when no
rounding is used.
f (Hz)

f max
(P1082)

f2

f1
tup t (s)
f 2 − f1
t up = ⋅ P1120
P1120 P1082

Setting the ramp-up time too short can cause the inverter to trip (overcurrent).
Note:
If an external frequency setpoint with set ramp rates is used (e.g. from a PLC). The best way to achieve
optimum drive performance is to set ramp times in P1120 and P1121 slightly shorter than those of the PLC.
Notice:
Ramp times will be used as follows:
- P1060 / P1061 : JOG mode is active
- P1120 / P1121 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active
- P1060 / P1061 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P1124 is active
P1121 Ramp-down time Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: s
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
10.00
650.00
1
Time taken for motor to decelerate from maximum motor frequency (P1082) down to standstill when no
rounding is used.
f (Hz)

f max
(P1082)

f2

f1
tdown t (s)
f 2 − f1
t down = ⋅ P1121
P1121 P1082
Notice:
Setting the ramp-down time too short can cause the inverter to trip (overcurrent (F0001) / overvoltage
(F0002)).

Ramp times will be used as follows:

- P1060 / P1061 : JOG mode is active
- P1120 / P1121 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active
- P1060 / P1061 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P1124 is active

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

84 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P1124 BI: Enable JOG ramp times Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
3
Defines source for switching between jog ramp times (P1060, P1061) and normal ramp times (P1120,
P1121) as applied to the RFG. This parameter is valid for normal mode (ON/OFF) only.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
Notice:
P1124 does not have any impact when JOG mode is selected. In this case, jog ramp times (P1060, P1061)
will be used all the time.

Ramp times will be used as follows:

- P1060 / P1061 : JOG mode is active
- P1120 / P1121 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active
- P1060 / P1061 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P1124 is active
P1130 Ramp-up initial rounding time Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.00
40.00
2
Defines initial rounding time in seconds as shown on the diagram below.

where:

f 2 - f 1 ⋅ P1120 ≥ 1 (P1130 + P1131)

for
P1082 2
1 f -f
t up = (P1130 + P1131) + 2 1 ⋅ P1120
2 P1082

f 2 - f1 1
for ⋅ P1121 ≥ (P1132 + P1133)
P1082 2
1 f -f
t down = (P1132 + P1133) + 2 1 ⋅ P1121
2 P1082
Note:
- If short or zero ramp times (P1120, P1121 < P1130, P1131, P1132, P1133) are set, the total ramp up
time (t_up) or ramp down time (t_down) will not depend on P1130.
- See equations above for valid conditions to calculate t_up and t_down.
- Rounding times are recommended, since they prevent an abrupt response, thus avoiding detrimental
effects on the mechanics.
- Rounding times are not recommended when analog inputs are used, since they would result in
overshoot/undershoot in the inverter response.
P1131 Ramp-up final rounding time Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def: 0.00
Max: 40.00
2
Defines rounding time at end of ramp-up as shown in P1130 (ramp-up initial rounding time).
Details:
See parameter P1130.
P1132 Ramp-down initial rounding time Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.00
40.00
2
Defines rounding time at start of ramp-down as shown in P1130 (ramp-up initial rounding time).
Details:
See parameter P1130.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 85
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P1133 Ramp-down final rounding time Min: 0.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.00
40.00
2
Defines rounding time at end of ramp-down as shown in P1130 (ramp-up initial rounding time).
Details:
See parameter P1130.
P1134 Rounding type Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
1
2
Defines the smoothing which is active by setpoint modifications during acceleration or deceleration (e.g.
new setpoint, OFF1, OFF3, REV).

This smoothing is applied, if the motor is ramped-up or ramped-down and

- P1134 = 0,
- P1132 > 0, P1133 > 0 and
- the setpoint is not yet reached.

Possible Settings:
0 Continuous smoothing
1 Discontinuous smoothing
Dependency:
No effect until P1132 (Ramp-down initial rounding time) or P1133 (Ramp-down final rounding time) > 0 s.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

86 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P1135 OFF3 ramp-down time Min: 0.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: s
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
5.00
650.00
2
Defines ramp-down time from maximum frequency to standstill for OFF3 command.

OFF3
t
f

f max f act,motor

(P1082)

f2
P2168 f act,inverter

P2167

0 t
P2168 f2
tdown,OFF3 t down,OFF3 = P1135 ⋅
P1082
P1135
r0052 Bit02
Operation
Pulse
cancellation t
Note:
This time may be exceeded if the VDC_max. level is reached.
P1140 BI: RFG enable Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1:0
4000:0
3
Defines command source of RFG enable command (RFG: ramp function generator). If binary input is equal
to zero then the RFG output will be set immediately to 0.
P1141 BI: RFG start Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def: 1:0
Max: 4000:0
3
Defines command source of RFG start command (RFG: ramp function generator). If binary input is equal to
zero then the RFG output is held at it present value.
P1142 BI: RFG enable setpoint Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 4000:0
1:0 3
Defines command source of RFG enable setpoint command (RFG: ramp function generator). If binary input
is equal to zero then the RFG input will be set to zero and the RFG output will be ramp-down to zero.
r1170 CO: Frequency setpoint after RFG Min: - Level

P-Group: SETPOINT
Datatype: Float Unit: Hz Def:
Max: -
- 3
Displays overall frequency setpoint after ramp generator.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 87
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

3.18 Flying restart

P1200 Flying start Min: 0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
6
2
Starts inverter onto a spinning motor by rapidly changing the output frequency of the inverter until the actual
motor speed has been found. Then, the motor runs up to setpoint using the normal ramp time.

Possible Settings:
0 Flying start disabled
1 Flying start is always active, start in direction of setpoint
2 Flying start is active if power on, fault, OFF2, start in direction of setpoint
3 Flying start is active if fault, OFF2, start in direction of setpoint
4 Flying start is always active, only in direction of setpoint
5 Flying start is active if power on, fault, OFF2, only in direction of setpoint
6 Flying start is active if fault, OFF2, only in direction of setpoint
Note:
- Useful for motors with high inertia loads.
- Settings 1 to 3 search in both directions.
- Settings 4 to 6 search only in direction of setpoint.
- Flying start must be used in cases where the motor may still be turning (e.g. after a short mains break)
or can be driven by the load. Otherwise, overcurrent trips will occur.
P1202 Motor-current: Flying start Min: 10 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def: 100
Max: 200
3
Defines search current used for flying start. Value is in [%] based on rated motor current (P0305).
Note:
- If the search current is reduced, the flying restart behavior can be improved if the system inertia is not
very high.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

88 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P1203 Search rate: Flying start Min: 10 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
100
200
3
Sets factor by which the output frequency changes during flying start to synchronize with turning motor. This
value is entered in [%] defines the reciprocal initial gradient in the search sequence (see curve below).
Parameter P1203 influences the time taken to search for the motor frequency.

The search time is the time taken to search through all frequencies between max. frequency P1082 + 2 x
f_slip to 0 Hz.

r0330
fmax + 2 fslip, nom = P1082 + 2 ⋅ ⋅ P0310
100

f fsearch

1 ms

fmotor

t
∆t [ms] fslip, nom [Hz] 2 [%] r0330
P1203 [%] = ⋅ ⋅ 2 [%] ⇒ ∆f = ⋅ ⋅ P0310
∆f [Hz] 1 [ms] P1203 [%] 100

P1203 = 100 % is defined as giving a rate of 2 % of f_slip,nom / [ms].

P1203 = 200 % would result in a rate of frequency change of 1 % of f_slip,nom / [ms].
Example:
For a motor with 50 Hz, 1350 rpm, 100 % would produce a maximum search time of 600 ms. If the motor is
turning, the motor frequency is found in a shorter time.
Note:
- A higher value produces a flatter gradient and thus a longer search time.
- A lower value has the opposite effect.
r1204 CO/BO: Status word:Flying start Min: - Level

P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max: -
- 3
Bit parameter for checking and monitoring states during search, if V/f control mode is selected (see P1300).
Bitfields:
Bit00 Current applied 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 Current could not be applied 0 NO 1 YES
Bit02 Voltage reduced 0 NO 1 YES
Bit03 Slope-filter started 0 NO 1 YES

Bit04 Current less threshold 0 NO 1 YES

Bit05 Current-minimum 0 NO 1 YES
Bit07 Speed could not be found 0 NO 1 YES
Bit08 Flying start active 0 NO 1 YES
Bit09 Flying start selected 0 NO 1 YES

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 89
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

3.19 Automatic restart

P1210 Automatic restart Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1
6
2
Configures automatic restart function
Possible Settings:
0 Disabled
1 Trip reset after power on, P1211 disabled
2 Restart after mains blackout, P1211 disabled
3 Restart after mains brownout or fault, P1211 enabled
4 Restart after mains brownout, P1211 enabled
5 Restart after mains blackout and fault, P1211 disabled
6 Restart after mains brown- /blackout or fault, P1211 disabled
Dependency:
Automatic restart requires constant ON command via a digital input wire link.
Caution:
P1210 > 2 can cause the motor to restart automatically without toggling the ON command !
Notice:
A "mains brownout" is where the power in interrupted and re-applied before the display on the BOP (if one
is fitted to the inverter) has gone dark (a very short mains break where the DC link has not fully collapsed).

A "mains blackout" is where the display has gone dark (a long mains break where the DC link has fully
collapsed) before the power is re-applied.

P1210 = 0:
Automatic restart is disabled.

P1210 = 1:
The inverter will acknowledge (reset) faults i.e. it will reset a fault when the is re-applied. This means the
inverter must be fully powered down, a brownout is not sufficed. The inverter will not run until the ON
command has been toggled.

P1210 = 2:
The inverter will acknowledge the fault F0003 at power on after blackout and restarts the drive. It is
necessary that the ON command is wired via digital input (DIN).

P1210 = 3:
For these settings it is fundamental that the drive only restarts if it has been in a RUN state at the time of the
faults (F0003, etc.). The inverter will acknowledge the fault and restarts the drive after a blackout or
bronwout. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via digital input (DIN).

P1210 = 4:
For these settings it is fundamental that the drive only restarts if it has been in a RUN state at the time of the
fault (F0003). The inverter will acknowledge the fault and restarts the drive after a blackout or bronwout. It is
necessary that the ON command is wired via digital input (DIN).

P1210 = 5:
The inverter will acknowledge the faults F0003 etc. at power on after blackout and restarts the drive. It is
necessary that the ON command is wired via digital input (DIN).

P1210 = 6:
The inverter will acknowledge the faults (F0003 etc.) at power on after blackout or brownout and restarts the
drive. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via digital input (DIN). Setting 6 causes the motor to
restart immediately.

Following table presents an overview of parameter P1210 and its functionality.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

90 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

Flying start must be used in cases where the motor may still be turning (e.g. after a short mains break) or
can be driven by the load (P1200).
P1211 Number of restart attempts Min: 0 Level
CStat:
P-Group: FUNC
CUT Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 10
3 3
Specifies number of times inverter will attempt to restart if automatic restart P1210 is activated.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 91
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

3.20 Motor holding brake

P1215 Holding brake enable Min: 0 Level
CStat: T
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
1
2
Enables/disables holding brake function. This function applies the following profile to the inverter:

ON / OFF2:

Inactive
OFF2
Active t

ON
OFF1/OFF3 t
Motor excitation
finished
r0056 Bit04 t

p0346
f

fmin
(p1080)
t
p1216

r0052.C Bit 12
1
0 t
open
Brake
Status
closed t
Brake Release Time Brake Closing Time
Possible Settings:
0 Motor holding brake disabled
1 Motor holding brake enabled

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

92 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

Caution:
1. To activate the motor holding brake, in addition to parameter P1215 = 1, the status signal r0052 bit 12
"motor holding brake active" must be output via a digital output. The user must also select the signal -
e.g. in parameter P0731.

2. If the motor holding brake is controlled by the drive inverter, then for potentially hazardous loads (e.g.
suspended/hanging loads for crane applications) the drive inverter may not be conditioned unless the
load has been secured. Before commissioning, potentially hazardous loads can be secured as follows:
- lower the load to the floor, or
- during commissioning or after replacing the drive inverter, prevent the drive inverter from controlling
the motor holding brake. Only then should STARTER be used to carry-out a quick commissioning or
a parameter download, etc. The motor holding brake terminals can then be re-used (for the motor
holding brake, in this case, it is not permissible to parameterize the system so that the digital output
P0748 is inverted).

3. In order to hold the motor against the mechanical brake at a certain frequency, it is important that the
min. frequency P1080 approximately corresponds to the slip frequency.
- If the value is selected to be too high, then the current drawn can be too high so that the drive
inverter trips (shuts down) due to an overcurrent condition.
- For a low value, it is possible that the torque cannot be established to hold the load.

4. It is not permissible to use the motor holding brake as operating brake as generally it is only designed
and dimensioned for a limited number of emergency braking operations.
Note:
Parameter settings:
- To open/close, a digital output controls the motor holding brake at point 1/2 (refer to the diagram). In this
case, as prerequisite, the motor holding brake P1215 must be activated as well as the motor holding
brake selected at the digital output.
- Brake opening time P1216 greater than/equal to the time for the holding brake to open.
- Brake delay time P1217 greater than/equal to the time to close the holding brake.
- Select the minimum frequency P1080 so that it acts like weight equalization.
- A typical value of the minimum frequency P1080 for the motor holding brake is the slip frequency of the
motor r0330. The rated slip frequency can be calculated using the following formula:
r0330 nsy n − nn
fSlip[Hz] = ⋅ P0310 = ⋅ fn
100 nsy n

The following closed-loop control parameters should be observed in conjunction with the motor holding
brake:
- P1310, P1311, P1333, P1335 for U/f
P1216 Holding brake release delay Min: 0.0 Level
CStat: T
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def: 1.0
Max: 20.0
2
Defines the brake opening time of the motor holding brake (MHB).

When the motor holding brake (P1215) is activated, then the setpoint enable is delayed by the selected
time. The time that it takes to open the mechanical brake is subject to certain fluctuations. This is the reason
that the drive inverter applies the min. frequency P1080 to the motor during this time. This means that the
brake can reliably open before the motor starts.

P1216 Release time of the brake + relay opening time(s)

Details:
See parameter P1215.
P1217 Holding time after ramp down Min: 0.0 Level
CStat: T
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1.0
20.0
2
Defines the brake delay time of the motor holding brake (MHB).

When the motor holding brake (P1215) is activated, after an off command, the pulse inhibit is delayed by
this selected time. The time that it takes to open the mechanical brake is subject to certain fluctuations. This
means that after braking to the min. frequency P1080, the motor is held at the minimum frequency for this
time. This means that the brake can reliably close before the motor is switched into a no-current condition.

P1217 Application time of the brake + relay closing time

Details:
See parameter P1215.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 93
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

3.21 DC braking

P1230 BI: Enable DC braking Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
3
Enables DC braking via a signal applied from an external source. Function remains active while external
input signal is active.

DC braking causes the motor to stop rapidly by applying a DC braking current (current applied also holds
shaft stationary).

When the DC braking signal is applied, the inverter output pulses are blocked and the DC current is not
applied until the motor has been sufficiently demagnetized.

BI: Enable DC brk.

P1230.C 1
(0:0) 0
f t
f_set
f*
DC braking

f_act

t
i P0347

DC braking active

r0053 1
Bit00 0
t
Note: DC brake can be applied in drive states r0002 = 1, 4, 5

The level of DC braking is set in P1232 (DC braking current - relative to the rated motor current) which is set
to 100 % by default.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)
Caution:
With the DC braking, the kinetic energy of the motor is converted into heat in the motor. The drive could
overheat if the remains in this status for an exessive period of time !

DC braking is not possible when using a synchronous motor (i.e. P0300 = 2).
Notice:
This delay time is set in P0347 (demagnetization time). If this delay is too short, overcurrent trips can occur.
P1232 DC braking current Min: 0 Level
CStat:
P-Group: FUNC
CUT Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 250
100 2
Defines level of DC current in [%] relative to rated motor current (P0305).

1 P1232
r0027DC−Brake [A] ≈ ⋅ P0305 ⋅
2 100 %

The current of the DC-braking is limited by r0067.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

94 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P1233 Duration of DC braking Min: 0.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.00
250.00
2
Defines duration for which DC injection braking is to be active following an OFF1 or OFF3 command.
Setting this parameter between 0.01 and 250.00 sets the time duration (in seconds) of the DC injection
starting with the OFF1 or OFF3 command.

1
ON
OFF1/OFF3 t
P0347
OFF2
t
f
OFF2
DC braking

t
DC braking active

r0053 1
Bit00 0 t
P1233

2
ON
OFF1/OFF3 t
P0347
OFF2
t
f
OFF2
DC braking

OFF2
t
DC braking active

r0053 1
Bit00 0 t
P1233

The DC current, that is impressed during time P1233, is specified by parameter P1232.
Value:
P1233 = 0.00 :
Not active following OFF1 / OFF3.

P1233 = 0.01 - 250.00 :

Active for the specified duration.
Caution:
With the DC braking, the kinetic energy of the motor is converted into heat in the motor. The drive could
overheat if the remains in this status for an exessive period of time !

DC braking is not possible when using a synchronous motor (i.e. P0300 = 2).
Notice:
The DC braking function causes the motor to stop rapidly by applying a DC braking current (the current
applied also holds the shaft stationary). When the DC braking signal is applied, the inverter output pulses
are blocked and the DC current not applied until the motor has been sufficiently demagnetized.
Demagnetization time is calculated automatically from motor data.

The inverter will not restart if an ON-command is given during this period.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 95
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

3.22 Compound braking

P1236 Compound braking current Min: 0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
250
2
Defines DC level superimposed on AC waveform after exeeding DC-link voltage threshold of compound
braking. The value is entered in [%] relative to rated motor current (P0305).

U = 1.13 ⋅ 2 ⋅ Vmains = 1.13 ⋅ 2 ⋅ P0210

DC_Comp

U = 0.98 ⋅ r1242
DC_Comp

The Compound Brake is an overlay of the DC brake function with regenerative braking (effective braking at
the ramp) after OFF1 or OFF3. This enables braking with controlled motor frequency and a minimum of
energy returned to the motor. Through optimization of the ramp-down time and the compound braking an
efficient braking without additional HW components is possible.

P1236 = 0 P1236 > 0

Without Compound braking With Compound braking
f f
f_set f_set

f_act f_act

t t

i i

t t

u DC-link u DC-link

UDC_Comp

t t
Value:
P1236 = 0 :
Compound braking disabled.

P1236 = 1 - 250 :
Level of DC braking current defined as a [%] of rated motor current (P0305).
Dependency:
Compound braking depends on the DC link voltage only (see threshold above). It will be active with
OFF1/OFF3 and at regenerating conditions.

It is disabled, when:
- DC braking is active
- Flying start is active
Notice:
Increasing the value will generally improve braking performance; however, if you set the value too high, an
overcurrent trip may result. If used with dynamic braking enabled as well compound braking will take
priority. If used with the Vdc max controller enabled the drive behaviour whilst braking may be worsened
paticularly with high values of compound braking.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

96 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

3.23 Vdc controller

P1240 Configuration of Vdc controller Min: 0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1
1
3
Enables / disables Vdc controller.

The Vdc controller dynamically controls the DC link voltage to prevent overvoltage trips on high inertia
systems.
Possible Settings:
0 Vdc controller disabled
1 Vdc-max controller enabled
Note:
Vdc max controller automatically increases ramp-down times to keep the DC-link voltage (r0026) within
limits (r1242).
r1242 CO: Switch-on level of Vdc-max Min: - Level

P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: Float Unit: V Def:
Max: -
- 3
Displays switch-on level of Vdc max controller.

r1242 = 1.15 ⋅ 2 ⋅ Vmains = 1.15 ⋅ 2 ⋅ P0210

Note:
Parameter r1242 (switch-in threshold) is determined by each power cycle, when precharging of the DC-link
is finished.
P1243 Dynamic factor of Vdc-max Min: 10 Level
CStat:
P-Group: FUNC
CUT Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def: 100
Max: 200
3
Defines dynamic factor for DC link controller in [%].
Dependency:
P1243 = 100 % means parameters P1250, P1251 and P1252 (gain, integration time and differential time)
are used as set. Otherwise, these are multiplied by P1243 (dynamic factor of Vdc-max).
Note:
Vdc controller adjustment is calculated automatically from motor and inverter data.
P1250 Gain of Vdc-controller Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def: 1.00
Max: 10.00
4
Enters gain for Vdc controller.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 97
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P1251 Integration time Vdc-controller Min: 0.1 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: ms
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
40.0
1000.0
4
Enters integral time constant for Vdc controller.
P1252 Differential time Vdc-controller Min: 0.0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: ms
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1.0
1000.0
4
Enters differential time constant for Vdc controller.
P1253 Vdc-controller output limitation Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
10.00
600.00
3
Limits maximum effect of Vdc max controller.
P1254 Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels Min: 0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: FUNC
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1
1
3
Enables/disables auto-detection of switch-on levels for Vdc control functionalities.

Following switch-on levels are calculated

Possible Settings:
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Note:
The switch-on thresholds are only calculated during the start-up of the inverter after connection to the
mains. An online-adaption is not performed during operation. This means that modification of P1254 does
not immediately take effect and variations in the mains are also not initially taken into account.

P1254 = 0 (Automatic Detection disabled):

The above thresholds are calculated via P0210, if automatic detection is disabled.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

98 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

3.24 Control mode

P1300 Control mode Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
0
3
2
Controls relationship between speed of motor and voltage supplied by inverter as illustrated in the diagram
below.

V
V Vmax
r0071
Vn
Vn
P0304
P1300 = 3
P1325
P1300 = 0
P1323

P1321
P1310
P1300 = 2

f f
0 fn f0 f1 f2 f3 fn fmax
0 Hz P1320 P1322 P1324 P0310 P1082
Possible Settings:
0 V/f with linear characteristic
1 V/f with FCC
2 V/f with parabolic characteristic
3 V/f with programmable characteristic
Note:
P1300 = 1 : V/f with FCC (flux current control)
- Maintains motor flux current for improved efficiency.
- If FCC is chosen, linear V/f is active at low frequencies.

P1300 = 2 : V/f with a quadratic characteristic

- Suitable for centrifugal fans / pumps

P1300 = 3 : V/f with a programmable characteristic

- User defined characteristic (see P1320)
- For synchronous motors (e.g. SIEMOSYN motors)

The following table presents an overview of control parameters (V/f) that can be modify in relationship to
P1300 dependencies:
ParNo. Parameter name Level V/f
P1300 =
0 1 2 3
P1300 Control mode 2 x x x x
P1310 Continuous boost 2 x x x x
P1311 Acceleration boost 2 x x x x
P1312 Starting boost 2 x x x x
P1316 Boost end frequency 3 x x x x
P1320 Programmable V/f freq. coord. 1 3 − − − x
P1321 Programmable V/f volt. coord. 1 3 − − − x
P1322 Programmable V/f freq. coord. 2 3 − − − x
P1323 Programmable V/f volt. coord. 2 3 − − − x
P1324 Programmable V/f freq. coord. 3 3 − − − x
P1325 Programmable V/f volt. coord. 3 3 − − − x
P1333 Start frequency for FCC 3 − x − −
P1335 Slip compensation 2 x x x x
P1336 CO: U/f Slip limit 2 x x x x
P1338 Resonance damping gain V/f 3 x x x x
P1340 Imax freq. controller prop. gain 3 x x x x
P1341 Imax controller integral time 3 x x x x
P1345 Imax controller prop. gain 3 x x x x
P1346 Imax voltage ctrl. integral time 3 x x x x
P1350 Voltage soft start 3 x x x x

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 99
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

3.25 V/f control parameters

P1310 Continuous boost Min: 0.0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
50.0
250.0
2
P1310 causes a voltage boost depending on the output frequency (see diagran). At low output frequencies
the output voltage is low to keep the flux level constant. However, the output voltage may be too low
- for magnetisation the asynchronous motor
- to hold the load
- to overcome losses in the system.

To compensate these effects, the output voltage can be increased using parameter P1310.

Defines boost level in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) applicable to both linear and quadratic V/f
curves according to the diagram below:

V
Linear V/f
Boost voltage

Vmax
Validity range

Vn g e
lta ON
(P0304) o
tv OFF t
tpu
Ou f
actual V Boost
VConBoost,100
= /f
00 l V
0)

t
13 a
(P orm

P1310 active
N

VConBoost,50 1
0 t

f
0 fBoost,end fn f max
(P1316) (P0310) (P1082)

ge
o lta
tv
pu
ut
O
2) c
= rati
00 ad
13 qu
(P al
rm
No

where voltage values are given

P1310
V ConBoost ,100 = P0305 ⋅ P0350 ⋅
100
V ConBoost,1 00
V ConBoost,5 0 =
2
Note:
- Increasing the boost levels increases motor heating (especially at standstill).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

100 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

- The boost values are combined when continuous boost (P1310) used in conjunction with other boost
parameters (acceleration boost P1311 and starting boost P1312).
- However priorities are allocated to these parameters as follows:
P1310 > P1311 > P1312

- The total boost is limited by following equation:

VBoost ≤ 3 ⋅ R s ⋅ IMot = 3 ⋅ P0305 ⋅ P0350

- Setting in P0640 (motor overload factor [%]) limits the boost:

VBoost P0640
≤
P0305 ⋅ P0350 100

P1311 Acceleration boost Min: 0.0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.0
250.0
2
P1311 will only produce boost during ramping, and is therefore useful for additional torque during
acceleration and deceleration. Contrary to P1312, that is only active when an ON command is given, p1311
is active after each acceleration resp. deceleration. The boost is active, if P1311 > 0 resp. if the conditiones
given below are fulfilled.

Applies boost in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) following a positive setpoint change and drops
back out once the setpoint is reached. It is activated when the setpoint changes and deactivated when the
setpoint is reached.

V Boost voltage Validity range

Vmax

Vn ON
(P0304) actual V Boost e OFF t
ag
volt f
ut
tp V/
f
VAccBoost,100 Ou al = 0)
m
r 0 t
No 130
( P P1311 active
VAccBoost,50
1
0 t
f
0 fBoost,end fn fmax
(P1316) (P0310) (P1082)

where voltage values are given

P1311
V AccBoost ,100 = P0305 ⋅ P0350 ⋅
100
V AccBoost,100
V AccBoost,50 =
2
Note:
See parameter P1310

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 101
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P1312 Starting boost Min: 0.0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.0
250.0
2
Applies a constant linear offset (in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current)) to active V/f curve (either
linear or quadratic) after an ON command and is active until
1) ramp output reaches setpoint for the first time respectively
2) setpoint is reduced to less than present ramp output

This is useful for starting loads with high inertia.

Setting the starting boost (P1312) too high will cause the inverter to limit the current, which will in turn
restrict the output frequency to below the setpoint frequency.

ge
olta
v
ut
u tp V/
f
O al = 0)
m
r 0
No 130
( P

where voltage values are given

P1312
V StartBoost ,100 = P0305 ⋅ P0350 ⋅
100
V StartBoost ,100
V StartBoost ,50 =
2
Example:
Setpoint = 50Hz. Ramping up with starting boost. During ramp up, setpoint changed to 20Hz. As soon as
setpoint changed, starting boost removed because setpoint smaller than present ramp output.
Note:
See parameter P1310
r1315 CO: Total boost voltage Min: - Level

P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float Unit: V Def:
Max: -
- 4
Displays total value of voltage boost (in volts).
P1316 Boost end frequency Min: 0.0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
20.0
100.0
3
Defines point at which programmed boost reaches 50 % of its value. This value is expressed in [%] relative
to P0310 (rated motor frequency).

The default frequency is defined as follows:

153
fBoost min = 2 ⋅ ( + 3)
Pmotor
Note:
- The expert user may change this value to alter the shape of the curve, e.g. to increase torque at a
particular frequency.
- Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.
Details:
See diagram in P1310 (continuous boost).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

102 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P1320 Programmable V/f freq. coord. 1 Min: 0.00 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.00
650.00
3
Sets V/f coordinates (P1320/1321 to P1324/1325) to define V/f characteristic.

Vmax Vmax = f(Vdc, Mmax)

r0071

Vn
P0304

P1325

P1323

P1321
P1310

f0 f1 f2 f3 fn fmax f
0 Hz P1320 P1322 P1324 P0310 P1082

P1310[%] r0395[%]
P1310[V] = ⋅ ⋅ P0304[V ]
100[%] 100[%]
Example:
This parameter can be used to provide correct torque at correct frequency and is useful when used with
synchronous motors.
Dependency:
To set parameter, select P1300 = 3 (V/f with programmable characteristic).
Note:
Linear interpolation will be applied between the individual data points.

V/f with programmable characteristic (P1300 = 3) has 3 programmable points. The two non-programmable
points are:
- Continuous boost P1310 at zero 0 Hz
- Rated motor voltage P0304 at rated motor frequency P0310

The acceleration boost and starting boost defined in P1311 and P1312 are applied to V/f with
programmable characteristic.
P1321 Programmable V/f volt. coord. 1 Min: 0.0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: V
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.0
3000.0
3
See P1320 (programmable V/f freq. coord. 1).
P1322 Programmable V/f freq. coord. 2 Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.00
650.00
3
See P1320 (programmable V/f freq. coord. 1).
P1323 Programmable V/f volt. coord. 2 Min: 0.0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: V
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.0
3000.0
3
See P1320 (programmable V/f freq. coord. 1).
P1324 Programmable V/f freq. coord. 3 Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.00
650.00
3
See P1320 (programmable V/f freq. coord. 1).
P1325 Programmable V/f volt. coord. 3 Min: 0.0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: V
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.0
3000.0
3
See P1320 (programmable V/f freq. coord. 1).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 103
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P1333 Start frequency for FCC Min: 0.0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
10.0
100.0
3
Defines the FCC starting frequency as a percentage of the rated motor frequency (P0310).

When FCC is activated using P1300 = 1, then as a function of the FCC starting frequency plus hysteresis
and the actual frequency, a changeover is made with a continuous transition between the linear V/f
characteristic (P1300 = 0) and FCC (refer to the diagram).

P0310 FCC
f FCC = ⋅ P1333

Switch-over
100

⋅ (P1333 + 6%)
P0310
f FCC +Hys =
100 V/f

f
fFCC fFCC+Hys
Notice:
- A value that is excessively low can result in instability.
- The constant voltage boost P1310 is continuously de-activated - essentially the same as when
switching-in FCC.
- Contrary, the voltage boosts P1311 and P1312 remain active over the complete frequency range.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

104 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

3.25.1 Slip compensation

P1335 Slip compensation Min: 0.0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.0
600.0
2
Dynamically adjusts output frequency of inverter so that motor speed is kept constant independent of motor
load.

In the V/f-control, the motor speed will always be less than the command speed due to the slip speed. For a
given speed command, the speed will drop as load is increased. The speed regulation of drive can be
improved by the technique known as slip compensation.

Increasing the load from M1 to M2 (see diagram) will decrease the motor speed from f1 to f2, due to the
slip. The inverter can compensate for this by increasing the output frequency slightly as the load increases.
The inverter measures the current and increases the output frequency to compensate for the expected slip.

Value:
P1335 = 0 % :
Slip compensation disabled.

P1335 = 50 % - 70 % :
Full slip compensation at cold motor (partial load).

P1335 = 100 % :
Full slip compensation at warm motor (full load).

Range of slip compensation :

f out
% fN with
slip compensation
P1335 without
slip compensation
f out f set
6 % 10 % 100 % fN 6 % 10 % fN
Notice:
The applied value of the slip compensation (scaled by P1335) is limited by following equation:

P1335 P1336
f Slip_comp_max = ⋅ r0330
100 100

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 105
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P1336 Slip limit Min: 0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
250
600
2
Compensation slip limit in [%] relative to r0330 (rated motor slip), which is added to frequency setpoint.
Dependency:
Slip compensation (P1335) active.
r1337 CO: V/f slip frequency Min: - Level

P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max: -
- 3
Displays actual compensated motor slip as [%]
Dependency:
Slip compensation (P1335) active.

3.25.2 Resonance damping

P1338 Resonance damping gain V/f Min: 0.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.00
10.00
3
Defines resonance damping gain for V/f. Here, di/dt of the acitve current will be scaled by P1338 (see
diagram below). If di/dt increases the resonance damping circuit decreases the inverter output frequency.

P1338

i active P1338 f res damping

T
-

Note:
- The resonance damping function is used to dampen oscillations in the active current. These especially
occur when rotating field motors are operating under no-load conditions. The parameter is not used to
optimize the stabilizing behavior.
- In the V/f control modes (refer to P1300), the resonance damping controller is activate in a range from
approximately 5 % up to 70 % of the rated motor frequency (P0310).
- An excessively high value results in instability (positive feedback).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

106 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

3.25.3 Imax controller

P1340 Imax controller prop. gain Min: 0.000 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.000
0.499
3
Proportional gain of the I_max frequency controller.

Dynamically controls the inverter if the output current exceeds the maximum motor current (r0067). It does
this by first limiting the inverter output frequency (to a possible minimum of the nominal slip frequency). If
this action does not successfully remove the overcurrent condition, the inverter output voltage is reduced.
When the overcurrent condition has been removed successfully, frequency limiting is removed using the
ramp-up time set in P1120.

Motor current

r0067

t
Imax -controller active
A0501
1
r0056 Bit13
0 t
f

P1341 Imax controller integral time Min: 0.000 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.300
50.000
3
Integral time constant of the I_max controller.

P1341 = 0 :
I_max controller disabled

P1340 = 0 and P1341 > 0 :

enhanced integral

P1340 > 0 and P1341 > 0 :

normal PI control

See description in parameter P1340 for further information.

r1343 CO: Imax controller freq. output Min: - Level

P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float Unit: Hz Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays effective frequency limitation.
Dependency:
If I_max controller not in operation, parameter normally shows max. frequency P1082.
r1344 CO: Imax controller volt. output Min: - Level

P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float Unit: V Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays amount by which the I_max controller is reducing the inverter output voltage.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 107
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P1349 Resonance damping limit Min: 80.0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
80.0
100.0
3
Defines the upper limit at which resonance damping is active for V/f.
Note:
The resonance circuit damps oscillations of the active current which frequently occur during no-load
operation (see P1338).

The limit is defined as a percentage of rated motor frequency (P0310). There is a

5% band below the upper limit through which the gain decreases in a linear fashion from full gain to zero
gain.

3.25.4 Soft starting

P1350 Voltage soft start Min: 0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: CONTROL
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
1
3
Selecting the soft starting function.

With soft starting, the flux in the motor is established with some delay. This ensures that the motor only
rotates in the required direction of rotation even with existing residual magnetism. When activated, at
powered-on, the output voltage is ramped-up to the value of the characteristic voltage within the
magnetizing time P0346.

Possible Settings:
0 OFF
1 ON
Note:
The settings for this parameter bring benefits and drawbacks:
- P1350 = 0: (jump to boost voltage)
Benefit: flux is built up quickly
Drawback: motor may move
- P1350 = 1: (smooth voltage build-up)
Benefit: motor less likely to move
Drawback: flux build-up takes longer

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

108 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

3.26 Inverter parameters (Modulator)

P1800 Pulse frequency Min: 2 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: kHz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
4
16
2
Sets pulse frequency of power switches in inverter. The frequency can be changed in steps of 2 kHz.
Dependency:
Minimum pulse frequency depends on P1082 (maximum frequency) and P0310 (rated motor frequency).
- see derating in P1082
- P1800 > 30 * P0310
Note:
- If the pulse frequency is increased, max. inverter current r0209 can be reduced (derating). The derating
characteristic depends on the type and power of the inverter (see manuall OPERATING
INSTRUCTION).
- If silent operation is not absolutely necessary, lower pulse frequencies may be selected to reduce
inverter losses and radio-frequency emissions.
- Under certain circumstances, the inverter may reduce the switching frequency to provide protection
against over-temperature (see P0290).
r1801 CO: Act. pulse frequency Min: - Level

P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: U16 Unit: kHz Def:
Max: -
- 3
Actual pulse frequency of power switches in inverter.
Notice:
Under certain conditions (inverter overtemperature, see P0290), this can differ from the values selected in
P1800 (pulse frequency).
P1802 Modulator mode Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 2
0 3
Selects inverter modulator mode.
Possible Settings:
0 SVM/ASVM automatic mode
1 Asymmetric SVM
2 Space vector modulation
Notice:
- Asymmetric space vector modulation (ASVM) produces lower switching losses than space vector
modulation (SVM), but may cause irregular rotation at very low frequencies.
- Space vector modulation (SVM) with over-modulation may produce current waveform distortion at high
output voltages.
- Space vector modulation (SVM) without over-modulation will reduce maximum output voltage available
to motor.
P1803 Max. modulation Min: 20.0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def: 106.0
Max: 150.0
4
Sets maximum modulation index.
Note:
- P1803 = 100 % : Limit for over-control (for ideal inverter without switching delay).
P1820 Reverse output phase sequence Min: 0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: INVERTER
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
1
2
Changes direction of motor rotation without changing setpoint polarity.
Possible Settings:
0 OFF
1 ON
Dependency:
If positive and negative revolution is enabled, frequency setpoint is directly used.
If both positive and negative revolution are disabled, reference value is set to zero.
Details:
See P1000 (select frequency setpoint)

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 109
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

3.27 Motor data identification

P1910 Select motor data identification Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
0
2
2
Performs a motor data identification.

Performs stator resistance measuring.

Possible Settings:
0 Disabled
1 Identification of Rs with parameter change
2 Identification of Rs without parameter change
Dependency:
No measurement if motor data incorrect.

P1910 = 1 : Calculated value for stator resistance (see P0350) is overwritten.

P1910 = 2 : Values already calculated are not overwritten.

Note:
- In order to that the motor identification routine supplies the correct data, before selecting, fast
commissioning should be carried-out.
- If the motor data identification routine is activated (e.g. P1910 = 1), then at the next ON command, the
measuring operation is started and alarm A0541 is generated. After the measurement is completed,
both P1910 and the alarm are reset.
Notice:
When choosing the setting for measurement, observe the following:

1. "with parameter change"

means that the value is actually adopted as P0350 parameter setting and applied to the control as well as
being shown in the read-only parameters below.

2. "without parameter change"

means that the value is only displayed, i.e. shown for checking purposes in the read-only parameter r1912
(identified stator resistance). The value is not applied to the control.
r1912 Identified stator resistance Min: - Level

P-Group: MOTOR
Datatype: Float Unit: Ohm Def:
Max: -
- 2
Displays measured stator resistance value (line-to-line) in [Ohms]
Note:
This value is measured using P1910 = 1 or 2 , i.e., identification of all parameters with/without change.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

110 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

3.28 Reference parameters

P2000 Reference frequency Min: 1.00 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMM
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
50.00
650.00
2
Parameter P2000 represents the reference frequency for frequency values which are displayed/transferred
as a percentage or a hexadecimal value. Where:
- hexadecimal 4000 H ==> P2000 (e.g.: USS-PZD)
- percentage 100 % ==> P2000 (e.g.: ADC)
Example:
If a BICO connection is made between two parameters or alternatively using P0719 or P1000, the "unit" of
the parameters (standardized (Hex) or physical (i.e. Hz) values) may differ. MICROMASTER implicitly
makes an automatic conversion to the target value.

P2016
r0021 [0]
USS-PZD r0021[Hz]
[1] y[Hex] = ⋅ 4000[Hex ]
BOP link P2000[Hz]
[2]
[3]
x[Hz] y[Hex]

r2015
[0] P1070
USS-PZD r2015[1]
[1] y[Hz] = ⋅ P2000
BOP link 4000[Hex]
[2]
[3]
x[Hex] y[Hz]
Caution:
Parameter P2000 represents the reference frequency of the above mentioned interfaces. A maximum
frequency setpoint of 2*P2000 can be applied via the corresponding interface. Unlike parameter P1082
(Max. Frequency) this limits the inverter frequency internally independent of the reference frequency. By
modification of P2000 it will also adapt the parameter to the new settings.

f (Hex) P1082
PZD

Setpoint Motor
f [Hz] channel f_act f_act,limit control
f (%)
ADC
Normalization Limitation

f(Hex) f(%)
f[Hz] = ⋅ P2000 = ⋅ P2000 f_act,limit = min(P1082, f_act)
4000(Hex) 100 %
Notice:
Reference variables are intended as an aid to presenting setpoint and actual value signals in a uniform
manner. This also applies to fixed settings entered as a precentage. A value of 100 % (USS / CB)
corresponds to a process data value of 4000H, or 4000 0000H in the case of double values.

In this respect, the following parameters are available:

P2000 Reference frequency Hz

P2001 Reference voltage V
P2002 Reference current A

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 111
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P2001 Reference voltage Min: 10 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: V
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1000
2000
3
Full-scale output voltage (i.e. 100 % ) used over serial link (corresponds to 4000H).
Example:
P2001 = 230 specifies that 4000H received via USS denotes 230 V.

If a BICO connection is made between two parameters, the "unit" of the parameters (standardized (Hex) or
physical (i.e. V) values) may differ. MICROMASTER implicitly makes an automatic conversion to the target
value.

r0026[V]
y[Hex] = ⋅ 4000[Hex ]
P2001[V]

P2002 Reference current Min: 0.10 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMM
Datatype: Float
Active: first confirm
Unit: A
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.10
10000.00
3
Full-scale output current used over serial link (corresponds to 4000H).
Example:
If a BICO connection is made between two parameters, the "unit" of the parameters (standardized (Hex) or
physical (i.e. A) values) may differ. MICROMASTER implicitly makes an automatic conversion to the target
value.

r0027[A]
y[Hex] = ⋅ 4000[Hex ]
P2002[A]

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

112 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

3.29 Communication parameters (USS, CB)

P2009[2] USS denormalization Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
1
3
Enables denormalization for USS.
Possible Settings:
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Index:
P2009[0] : Serial interface COM link
P2009[1] : Serial interface BOP link
Note:
If denormalization is enabled, the main setpoint (word 2 in PZD) is not interpreted as 100 % = 4000H, but as
"absolute" instead (e.g. 4000H = 16384 means 163.84 Hz ) if this is a frequency. Denormalization (P2009 =
1) only works for frequencies and is intended for backwards compatibility with MM3.
P2010[2] USS baudrate Min: 3 Level
CStat:
P-Group: COMM
CUT Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 9
6 2
Sets baud rate for USS communication.
Possible Settings:
3 1200 baud
4 2400 baud
5 4800 baud
6 9600 baud
7 19200 baud
8 38400 baud
9 57600 baud
Index:
P2010[0] : Serial interface COM link
P2010[1] : Serial interface BOP link
P2011[2] USS address Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
31
2
Sets unique address for inverter.
Index:
P2011[0] : Serial interface COM link
P2011[1] : Serial interface BOP link
Note:
You can connect up to a further 30 inverters via the serial link (i.e. 31 inverters in total) and control them
with the USS serial bus protocol.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 113
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P2012[2] USS PZD length Min: 0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
2
4
3
Defines the number of 16-bit words in PZD part of USS telegram.
Index:
P2012[0] : Serial interface COM link
P2012[1] : Serial interface BOP link
Notice:
USS protocol consists of PZD and PKW which can be changed by the user via parameters P2012 and
P2013 respectively.

USS telegram

Parameter Process data

STX LGE ADR BCC
PKW PZD

PKE IND PWE PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4

STX Start of text PKE Parameter ID

LGE Length IND Sub-index
ADR Address PWE Parameter value
PKW Parameter ID value
PZD Process data
BCC Block check character

PZD transmits a control word and setpoint or status word and actual values. The number of PZD-words in a
USS-telegram are determined by parameter P2012, where the first two words (P2012 >= 2) are either:
- control word and main setpoint or
- status word and actual value.

Restrictions:
- If the above serial interface controls the inverter (P0700 or P0719) then the 1st control word must be
transferred in the 1st PZD-word.
- If the setpoint source is selected via P1000 or P0719, then the main setpoint must be transfered in the
2nd PZD-word,
- When P2012 is greater than or equal to 4 the additional control word (2nd control word) must
transferred in the 4th PZD-word, if the serial interface controls the inverter (P0700 or P0719).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

114 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P2013[2] USS PKW length Min: 0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
127
127
3
Defines the number of 16-bit words in PKW part of USS telegram.

The PKW part consists of the PKE part (1. word), IND part (2. word) resp. PWE part (3. - n. word). In
contrary to the IND and PKE part, the PWE part can be varied. Depending on the particular requirement, 3-
word, 4-word or variable word lengths can be parameterized. The PKW part of the USS telegram is used to
read and write individual parameter values.
Possible Settings:
0 No words
3 3 words
4 4 words
127 Variable
Index:
P2013[0] : Serial interface COM link
P2013[1] : Serial interface BOP link
Example:
Data type
U16 (16 Bit) U32 (32 Bit) Float (32 Bit)
P2013 = 3 X Parameter access fault Parameter access fault
P2013 = 4 X X X
P2013 = 127 X X X
Notice:
USS protocol consists of PZD and PKW which can be changed by the user via parameters P2012 and
P2013 respectively. Parameter P2013 determines the number of PKW-words in a USS-telegram.

Setting P2013 to 3 or 4 determines the length of the PKW (3 = three words and 4 = four words). When
P2013 set to 127 automatically adjusts the length of the PKW words are required.

P2013 = 3 P2013
PKE IND PWE

1 word
each 16 Bit

P2013 = 4 P2013
PKE IND PWE

PKE Parameter ID
IND Sub-index
PWE Parameter value

If a fixed PKW length is selected only one parameter value can be transferred. In the case of indexed
parameter, you must use the variable PKW length if you wish to have the values of all indices transferred in
a single telegram. In selecting the fixed PKW length, it is important to ensure the value in question can be
transferred using this PKW length.

P2013 = 3, fixes PKW length, but does not allow access to many parameter values. A parameter fault is
generated when an out-of-range value is used, the value will not be accepted but the inverter state will not
be affected. Useful for applications where parameters are not changed, but MM3s are also used. Broadcast
mode is not possible with this setting.

P2013 = 4, fixes PKW length. Allows access to all parameters, but indexed parameters can only be read
one index at a time. Word order for single word values are different to setting 3 or 127, see example below.

P2013 = 127, most useful setting. PKW reply length varies depending on the amount of information needed.
Can read fault information and all indices of a parameter with a single telegram with this setting.

Example:
Set P0700 to value 5 (0700 = 2BC (hex))

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 115
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P2014[2] USS telegram off time Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: ms
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
65535
3
Defines the telegram failure time for the serial interfaces with USS protocol.

The telegram failure time defines the time within which a valid telegram must have been received. If a valid
telegram is not received within the specified time, the drive inverter outputs fault F0070.
Index:
P2014[0] : Serial interface COM link
P2014[1] : Serial interface BOP link
Notice:
By default (time set to 0), no fault is generated (i.e. watchdog disabled).
r2015[4] CO: PZD from BOP link (USS) Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays process data received via USS on BOP link (RS232 USS).

Index:
r2015[0] : Received word 0
r2015[1] : Received word 1
r2015[2] : Received word 2
r2015[3] : Received word 3
Note:
The control words can be viewed as bit parameters r2032 and r2033.

Restrictions:
- If the above serial interface controls the inverter (P0700 or P0719) then the 1st control word must be
transferred in the 1st PZD-word.
- If the setpoint source is selected via P1000 or P0719, then the main setpoint must be transfered in the
2nd PZD-word,
- When P2012 is equal to 4 the additional control word (2nd control word) must transferred in the 4th
PZD-word, if the above serial interface controls the inverter (P0700 or P0719).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

116 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P2016[4] CI: PZD to BOP link (USS) Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U32
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
52:0
4000:0
3
Selects signals (process data PZD) to be transmitted to serial interface via USS on BOP link

r0052 P2016
r0052 [0]
r0021 [1]
[2]
r0053 [3]
r0053
PZD4 PZD3 PZD2 PZD1
ZSW2 HIW ZSW1
P2012
STX Start of text
LGE Length
ADR Address
PKW Parameter ID value
PZD Process data
BCC Block check character PZD PKW
BCC Process data Parameter ADR LGE STX
ZSW Status word
HIW Main actual value
USS telegram

PZD mapping from parameter P2016 USS on BOP link

Index:
P2016[0] : Transmitted word 0
P2016[1] : Transmitted word 1
P2016[2] : Transmitted word 2
P2016[3] : Transmitted word 3
Example:
P2016[0] = 52.0 (default). In this case, the value of r0052[0] (CO/BO: Status word) is transmitted as 1st
PZD to the BOP link.
Note:
If r0052 not indexed, display does not show an index (".0" ).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 117
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

r2018[4] CO: PZD from COM link (USS) Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays process data received via USS on COM link.

Index:
r2018[0] : Received word 0
r2018[1] : Received word 1
r2018[2] : Received word 2
r2018[3] : Received word 3
Note:
The control words can be viewed as bit parameters r2036 and r2037.

Restrictions:
- If the above serial interface controls the inverter (P0700 or P0719) then the 1st control word must be
transferred in the 1st PZD-word.
- If the setpoint source is selected via P1000 or P0719, then the main setpoint must be transfered in the
2nd PZD-word,
- When P2012 is equal to 4 the additional control word (2nd control word) must transferred in the 4th
PZD-word, if the above serial interface controls the inverter (P0700 or P0719).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

118 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P2019[4] CI: PZD to COM link (USS) Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U32
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
52:0
4000:0
3
Selects signals (process data PZD) to be transmitted to serial interface via USS on COM link

r0052 P2019
r0052 [0]
r0021 [1]
[2]
r0053 [3]
r0053
PZD4 PZD3 PZD2 PZD1
ZSW2 HIW ZSW1
P2012
STX Start of text
LGE Length
ADR Address
PKW Parameter ID value
PZD Process data
PZD PKW
BCC Block check character BCC Process data Parameter ADR LGE STX
ZSW Status word
HIW Main actual value
USS telegram

PZD mapping from parameter P2019 USS on COM link

Index:
P2019[0] : Transmitted word 0
P2019[1] : Transmitted word 1
P2019[2] : Transmitted word 2
P2019[3] : Transmitted word 3
Details:
See P2016 (PZD to BOP link)
r2024[2] USS error-free telegrams Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays number of error-free USS telegrams received.
Index:
r2024[0] : Serial interface COM link
r2024[1] : Serial interface BOP link
r2025[2] USS rejected telegrams Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays the number of rejected USS telegrams. The sum of all USS errors (r2026 - r2031) is displayed in
parameter r2025.

The following monitoring mechanisms have been implemented

- when a telegram is received, then initially, the correct start of a telegram (start interval + STX) must be
identified and then the length must be evaluated (LGE). If the length does not correspond to the
selected value for a fixed telegram or it does not have a valid value for a variable telegram length, the
telegram is rejected.
- the appropriate times are monitored before and while receiving telegrams.
- the block check character (BCC) is generated while the telegram is received and after the complete
telegram has been read-in, this is compared with the received BCC. If these do not match, then the
telegram is not evaluated.
- if a character frame error or a parity error has not occurred in any of the received characters, then the
node number (ADR) of the received telegram can be evaluated.
- the telegram is rejected if the address byte (ADR) does not correspond to the node number (for slave)
or the expected slave node number (for the master).
Index:
r2025[0] : Serial interface COM link
r2025[1] : Serial interface BOP link
r2026[2] USS character frame error Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays number of USS character frame errors.
Index:
r2026[0] : Serial interface COM link
r2026[1] : Serial interface BOP link

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 119
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

r2027[2] USS overrun error Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays number of USS telegrams with overrun error.
Index:
r2027[0] : Serial interface COM link
r2027[1] : Serial interface BOP link
r2028[2] USS parity error Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays number of USS telegrams with parity error.
Index:
r2028[0] : Serial interface COM link
r2028[1] : Serial interface BOP link
r2029[2] USS start not identified Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays number of USS telegrams with unidentified start.
Index:
r2029[0] : Serial interface COM link
r2029[1] : Serial interface BOP link
r2030[2] USS BCC error Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays number of USS telegrams with BCC error.
Index:
r2030[0] : Serial interface COM link
r2030[1] : Serial interface BOP link
r2031[2] USS length error Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays number of USS telegrams with incorrect length.
Index:
r2031[0] : Serial interface COM link
r2031[1] : Serial interface BOP link
r2032 BO: CtrlWrd1 from BOP link (USS) Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays control word 1 from BOP link (word 1 within USS).
Bitfields:
Bit00 ON/OFF1 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 OFF2: Electrical stop 0 YES 1 NO
Bit02 OFF3: Fast stop 0 YES 1 NO
Bit03 Pulses enabled 0 NO 1 YES

Bit04 RFG enable 0 NO 1 YES

Bit05 RFG start 0 NO 1 YES
Bit06 Setpoint enable 0 NO 1 YES
Bit07 Fault acknowledge 0 NO 1 YES

Bit08 JOG right 0 NO 1 YES

Bit09 JOG left 0 NO 1 YES
Bit10 Control from PLC 0 NO 1 YES
Bit11 Reverse (setpoint inversion) 0 NO 1 YES

Bit13 Motor potentiometer MOP up 0 NO 1 YES

Bit14 Motor potentiometer MOP down 0 NO 1 YES
Bit15 Local / Remote 0 NO 1 YES

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

120 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

r2033 BO: CtrlWrd2 from BOP link (USS) Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays control word 2 from BOP link (i.e. word 4 within USS).
Bitfields:
Bit00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 Fixed frequency Bit 1 0 NO 1 YES
Bit02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 0 NO 1 YES
Bit08 PID enabled 0 NO 1 YES

Bit09 DC brake enabled 0 NO 1 YES

Bit13 External fault 1 0 YES 1 NO
Dependency:
P0700 = 4 (USS on BOP link) and P0719 = 0 (Cmd / Setpoint = BICO parameter).
r2036 BO: CtrlWrd1 from COM link (USS) Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays control word 1 from COM link (i.e. word 1 within USS).
Bitfields:
Bit00 ON/OFF1 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 OFF2: Electrical stop 0 YES 1 NO
Bit02 OFF3: Fast stop 0 YES 1 NO
Bit03 Pulses enabled 0 NO 1 YES

Bit04 RFG enable 0 NO 1 YES

Bit05 RFG start 0 NO 1 YES
Bit06 Setpoint enable 0 NO 1 YES
Bit07 Fault acknowledge 0 NO 1 YES

Bit08 JOG right 0 NO 1 YES

Bit09 JOG left 0 NO 1 YES
Bit10 Control from PLC 0 NO 1 YES
Bit11 Reverse (setpoint inversion) 0 NO 1 YES

Bit13 Motor potentiometer MOP up 0 NO 1 YES

Bit14 Motor potentiometer MOP down 0 NO 1 YES
Bit15 Local / Remote 0 NO 1 YES
Details:
See r2033 (control word 2 from BOP link).
r2037 BO: CtrlWrd2 from COM link (USS) Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays control word 2 from COM link (i.e. word 4 within USS).
Bitfields:
Bit00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 Fixed frequency Bit 1 0 NO 1 YES
Bit02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 0 NO 1 YES
Bit08 PID enabled 0 NO 1 YES

Bit09 DC brake enabled 0 NO 1 YES

Bit13 External fault 1 0 YES 1 NO
Details:
See r2033 (control word 2 from BOP link).
P2040 CB telegram off time Min: 0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: ms
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
20
65535
3
Defines time after which a fault will be generated (F0070) if no telegram is received via the link.

The telegramm off time defines the time, within which a valid telegram must be received. If no valid telegram
is received within that time, the inverter trips with F0070.
Dependency:
Setting 0 = watchdog disabled

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 121
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P2041[5] CB parameter Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
65535
3
Configures a communication board (CB).
Index:
P2041[0] : CB parameter 0
P2041[1] : CB parameter 1
P2041[2] : CB parameter 2
P2041[3] : CB parameter 3
P2041[4] : CB parameter 4
Details:
See relevant communication board manual for protocol definition and appropriate settings.
r2050[4] CO: PZD from CB Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays PZD received from communication board (CB).

r2050
[0] r2090
[1]
[2]
[3]
r2091
PZD4 PZD3 PZD2 PZD1
STW2 HSW STW1

PZD PKW PKW Parameter ID value

CB-Frame Process data Parameter CB-Frame PZD Process data
STW Control word
P2041[0] HSW Main setpoint
CB telegram

CB on COM link PZD mapping to parameter r2050

Index:
r2050[0] : Received word 0
r2050[1] : Received word 1
r2050[2] : Received word 2
r2050[3] : Received word 3
Note:
The control words can be viewed as bit parameters r2090 and r2091.

Restrictions:
- If the above serial interface controls the inverter (P0700 or P0719) then the 1st control word must be
transferred in the 1st PZD-word.
- If the setpoint source is selected via P1000 or P0719, then the main setpoint must be transfered in the
2nd PZD-word,
- When P2012 is equal to 4 the additional control word (2nd control word) must transferred in the 4th
PZD-word, if the above serial interface controls the inverter (P0700 or P0719).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

122 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P2051[4] CI: PZD to CB Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U32
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
52:0
4000:0
3
Selects signals (process data PZD) to be transmitted via CB on COM link

r0052 P2051
r0052 [0]
r0021 [1]
[2]
r0053 [3]
r0053
PZD4 PZD3 PZD2 PZD1
ZSW2 HIW ZSW1

PKW Parameter ID value PZD PKW

PZD Process data CB-Frame Process data Parameter CB-Frame
ZSW Status word
HIW Main actual value P2041[0]
USS telegram

PZD mapping from parameter P2051 CB on COM link

Index:
P2051[0] : Transmitted word 0
P2051[1] : Transmitted word 1
P2051[2] : Transmitted word 2
P2051[3] : Transmitted word 3
Common Settings:
- Status word 1 = 52 CO/BO: Act. status word 1 (see r0052)
- Actual value 1 = 21 inverter output frequency (see r0021)
- Other BICO settings are possible
r2053[5] CB identification Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays identification data of the communication board (CB). The different CB types (r2053[0]) are given in
the Enum declaration.
Possible Settings:
0 No CB option board
1 PROFIBUS DP
2 DeviceNet
256 not defined
Index:
r2053[0] : CB type (PROFIBUS = 1)
r2053[1] : Firmware version
r2053[2] : Firmware version detail
r2053[3] : Firmware date (year)
r2053[4] : Firmware date (day/month)
r2054[7] CB diagnosis Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max: -
- 3
Displays diagnostic information of communication board (CB).
Index:
r2054[0] : CB diagnosis 0
r2054[1] : CB diagnosis 1
r2054[2] : CB diagnosis 2
r2054[3] : CB diagnosis 3
r2054[4] : CB diagnosis 4
r2054[5] : CB diagnosis 5
r2054[6] : CB diagnosis 6
Details:
See relevant communications board manual.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 123
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

r2090 BO: Control word 1 from CB Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays control word 1 received from communication board (CB).
Bitfields:
Bit00 ON/OFF1 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 OFF2: Electrical stop 0 YES 1 NO
Bit02 OFF3: Fast stop 0 YES 1 NO
Bit03 Pulses enabled 0 NO 1 YES

Bit04 RFG enable 0 NO 1 YES

Bit05 RFG start 0 NO 1 YES
Bit06 Setpoint enable 0 NO 1 YES
Bit07 Fault acknowledge 0 NO 1 YES

Bit08 JOG right 0 NO 1 YES

Bit09 JOG left 0 NO 1 YES
Bit10 Control from PLC 0 NO 1 YES
Bit11 Reverse (setpoint inversion) 0 NO 1 YES

Bit13 Motor potentiometer MOP up 0 NO 1 YES

Bit14 Motor potentiometer MOP down 0 NO 1 YES
Bit15 Local / Remote 0 NO 1 YES
Details:
See relevant communication board manual for protocol definition and appropriate settings.
r2091 BO: Control word 2 from CB Min: - Level

P-Group: COMM
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays control word 2 received from communication board (CB).
Bitfields:
Bit00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 Fixed frequency Bit 1 0 NO 1 YES
Bit02 Fixed frequency Bit 2 0 NO 1 YES
Bit08 PID enabled 0 NO 1 YES

Bit09 DC brake enabled 0 NO 1 YES

Bit13 External fault 1 0 YES 1 NO
Details:
See relevant communication board manual for protocol definition and appropriate settings.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

124 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

3.30 Faults, Alarms, Monitoring

P2100[3] Alarm number selection Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
65535
3
Selects up to 3 faults or warnings for non-default reactions.
Index:
P2100[0] : Fault Number 1
P2100[1] : Fault Number 2
P2100[2] : Fault Number 3
Example:
If you want F0005 to perform an OFF3 instead of an OFF2, set P2100[0] = 5, then select the desired
reaction in P2101[0] (in this case, set P2101[0] = 3).
Note:
All fault codes have a default reaction to OFF2. Some fault codes caused by hardware trips (e.g.
overcurrent) cannot be changed from the default reactions.
P2101[3] Stop reaction value Min: 0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
4
3
Sets drive stop reaction values for fault selected by P2100 (alarm number stop reaction).

This indexed parameter specifies the special reaction to the faults/warnings defined in P2100 indices 0 to 2.
Possible Settings:
0 No reaction, no display
1 OFF1 stop reaction
2 OFF2 stop reaction
3 OFF3 stop reaction
4 No reaction warning only
Index:
P2101[0] : Stop reaction value 1
P2101[1] : Stop reaction value 2
P2101[2] : Stop reaction value 3
Note:
- Settings 0 - 3 only are available for fault codes.
- Settings 0 and 4 only are available for warnings.
- Index 0 (P2101) refers to fault/warning in index 0 (P2100).
P2103 BI: 1. Faults acknowledgement Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def: 722:2
Max: 4000:0
3
Defines first source of fault acknowledgement, e.g. keypad/DIN, etc. (depending on setting).
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)
P2104 BI: 2. Faults acknowledgement Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
3
Selects second source of fault acknowledgement.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)
P2106 BI: External fault Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1:0
4000:0
3
Selects source of external faults.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 125
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

r2110[4] CO: Warning number Min: - Level

P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays warning information.

A maximum of 2 active warnings (indices 0 and 1) and 2 historical warnings (indices 2 and 3) may be
viewed.
Index:
r2110[0] : Recent Warnings --, warning 1
r2110[1] : Recent Warnings --, warning 2
r2110[2] : Recent Warnings -1, warning 3
r2110[3] : Recent Warnings -1, warning 4
Note:
- Indices 0 and 1 are not stored.
- The keypad will flash while a warning is active. The LEDs indicate the warning status in this case.

- If an AOP is in use, the display will show number and text of the active warning.
P2111 Total number of warnings Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
4
3
Displays number of warning (up to 4) since last reset. Set to 0 to reset the warning history.
r2114[2] Run time counter Min: - Level

P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays run time counter.

It is the total time the drive has been powered up. When power goes value is saved, then restored on
powerup. The run time counter r2114 will be calculate as followed:
- Multiply the value in r2114[0], by 65536 and then add it to the value in r2114[1].
- The resultant answer will be in seconds.

When AOP is not connected, the time in this parameter is used by r0948 to indicate when a fault has
occured.
Index:
r2114[0] : System Time, Seconds, Upper Word
r2114[1] : System Time, Seconds, Lower Word
Example:
If r2114[0] = 1 & r2114[1] = 20864
We get 1 * 65536 + 20864 = 86400 seconds which equals 1 day.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

126 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P2115[3] AOP real time clock Min: 0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
65535
3
Displays AOP real time.

All of the frequency inverters have an internal time generator function which is used to time-stamp and log
erroneous conditions. Therefore there is no battery-buffered real-time clock (RTC). The frequency inverters
can support a software-controlled RTC where the RTC must be set from the AOP or via an interface. When
using the AOP, this synchronization is automatic. When a serial interface is used, a task must be sent from
the higher-level control to write into the parameter. If the AOP is withdrawn during operation, or if the bus is
interrupted, then the real-time clock runs further using the runtime counter. The real-time clock is reset to
zero only after power off.

The time is stored in a word array parameter P2115. This parameter number is common to all invertes.
Inverters not supporting this feature would respond with parameter not recognised - a Master will ignore
this. The time will be set by USS Protocol standard word array parameter write telegrams.

Within the AOP, while it is acting as a USS Master, at each tick of the heartbeat, the list of available USS
Slaves will be flagged with a time update request. As the Master runs around the list of USS slaves on its
next USS update cycle, if there are no higher priority tasks to perform, and the slave still has its time update
flag set, then an array parameter write telegram will be issued, containing the current time. The request for
that slave is cancelled if the slave responds correctly. The AOP will not need to read the time from the
slave.

Time is maintained in a word array parameter and encoded as follows - the same format will be used in fault
report logs.

Index High Byte (MSB) Low Byte (LSB)

0 Seconds (0 - 59) Minutes (0 - 59)
1 Hours (0 - 23) Days (1 - 31)
2 Month (1 - 12) Years (00 - 250)

Time is measured from Jan 1st 2000. Values are in binary form.
Index:
P2115[0] : Real Time, Seconds+Minutes
P2115[1] : Real Time, Hours+Days
P2115[2] : Real Time, Month+Year
Example:
P2115[0] = 13625
P2115[1] = 2579
P2115[2] = 516

The conversion into binary quantities (U16) results in the following bit pattern:
Seconds + minutes:
- High byte (MSB) = 00110101 corresponding to the number 53, i.e. seconds 53
- Low byte (LSB) = 00111001 corresponding to the number 57, i.e. minutes 57

Hours + days:
- High byte (MSB) = 00001010 corresponding to the number 10, i.e. hours 10
- Low byte (LSB) = 00010011 corresponding to the number 19, i.e. days 19

Months + year:
- High byte (MSB) = 00000010 corresponding to the number 2, i.e. months 2
- Low byte (LSB) = 00000100 corresponding to the number 4, i.e. years 4

This means that the real time displayed in P2115 is 19.02.2004, 10:57:53.
P2120 Indication counter Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
65535
4
Indicates total number of alarm events. This parameter is incremented whenever an alarm event occurs. It
also gets incremented when a warning is cleared or faults are cleared.

This parameter is used by the PC tools.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 127
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P2150 Hysteresis frequency f_hys Min: 0.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
3.00
10.00
3
Defines hysteresis level applied for comparing frequency and speed to threshold as illustrated in the
diagram below.

f_act > 0

f_act 1 f_act > 0

0 r2197 Bit03

{
r0052 Bit14

0
Hyst. freq. f_hys
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz]
P2150.D (3.00)

f_set 1 | f_act | >= | f_set |

- 0 r2197 Bit04

{
r0053 Bit06
1

-1 Hyst. freq. f_hys

| f_act| >= | f_set | 0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz]
P2150.D (3.00)

P2155 Threshold frequency f_1 Min: 0.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
30.00
650.00
3
Sets a threshold for comparing actual frequency or frequency to threshold values f_1. This threshold
controls status bits 4 and 5 in status word 2 (r0053).

| f_act | <= f_1 Threshold freq f_1

0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] Delay time of f_1
| f_act | > f_1 P2155.D (30.00) 0 ... 10000 [ms]
P2156.D (10)

f_act 1 T 0
| f_act | <= f_1
0
{

Threshold freq f_1 r2197 Bit01

0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] r0053 Bit05
P2155.D (30.00)
Hyst. freq. f_hys
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz]
P2150.D (3.00) | f_act | > f_1
1 T 0
0
{

r2197 Bit02
Delay time of f_1 r0053 Bit04
Hyst. freq. f_hys 0 ... 10000 [ms]
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz] P2156.D (10)
P2150.D (3.00)

P2156 Delay time of threshold freq f_1 Min: 0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: ms
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
10
10000
3
Sets delay time prior to threshold frequency f_1 comparison (P2155).
Details:
See diagram in P2155 (threshold frequency f_1)

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

128 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P2164 Hysteresis frequency deviation Min: 0.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
3.00
10.00
3
Hysteresis frequency for detecting permitted deviation (from setpoint). This frequency controls bit 8 in status
word 1 (r0052) and bit 6 in status word 2 (r0053).

0
f_act == f_set

1 f_act == f_set
f_act –
0
+ r2197 Bit07
r0052 Bit08
f_set r0053 Bit06
Hyster freq deviat
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz]
P2164.D (3.00)

P2167 Switch-off frequency f_off Min: 0.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: Hz
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1.00
10.00
3
Defines the threshold of the monitoring function |f_act| <= P2167 (f_off).

P2167 influences following functions:

- If the actual frequency falls below this threshold and the time delay has expired, bit 1 in status word 2
(r0053) is reset.
- If a OFF1 or OFF3 was applied and bit 1 is reset the inverter will disable the pulse (OFF2).

Restriction:
- The monitoring function |f_act| <= P2167 (f_off) is not updated and pulses are not disabled, if motor
holding brake (MHB, P1215 = 1) is enabled.

ON
OFF1/OFF3 t

|f| OFF1/OFF3
f act

P2167

|f_act| > P2167

r0053 1
Bit 01 0 t
P2168 P2168 P2168
OFF2
Inactive
Active t

P2168 Delay time T_off Min: 0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: ms
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
10
10000
3
Defines time for which the inverter may operate below switch-off frequency (P2167) before switch off
occurs.
Dependency:
Active if holding brake (P1215) not parameterized.
Details:
See diagram in P2167 (switch-off frequency)

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 129
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P2170 Threshold current I_thresh Min: 0.0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
100.0
400.0
3
Defines threshold current in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) to be used in comparisons of I_act
and I_Thresh as illustrated in the diagram below.

Note:
This threshold controls bit 3 in status word 3 (r0053).
P2171 Delay time current Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: ms
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
10
10000
3
Defines delay time prior to activation of current comparison.
Details:
See diagram in P2170 (threshold current I_thresh)
P2172 Threshold DC-link voltage Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: V
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
800
2000
3
Defines DC link voltage to be compared to actual voltage as illustrated in the diagram below.

Note:
This voltage controls bits 7 and 8 in status word 3 (r0053).
Changing this threshold does not change the threshold of F0002 (Overvoltage).
P2173 Delay time DC-link voltage Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: ms
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
10
10000
3
Defines delay time prior to activation of threshold comparison.
Details:
See diagram in P2172 (threshold DC-link voltage)

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

130 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P2179 Current limit for no load ident. Min: 0.0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
3.0
10.0
3
Threshold current for A0922 (load missing) in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) as illustrated in the
diagram below.

Load missing

| I_act | 1

Cur.lim:no-load ID
0.0 ... 10.0 [%]
Pulse_enable P2179 (3.0) Load missing
T 0

r2197 Bit11

Load missing delay

0 ... 10000 [ms]
P2180 (2000)
1
| V_act |
0

Note:
- It may be that the motor is not connected (load missing) or a phase could be missing.
- If a motor setpoint cannot be entered and the current limit (P2179) is not exceeded, Alarm A0922 (no
load applied) is issued when delay time (P2180) expires.
P2180 Delay time for load missing Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: ms
QuickComm.: No
Def: 2000
Max: 10000
3
Delay time to identify that the current is less than the threshold defined in P2179.
Details:
See diagram in P2179 (current limit for no load identification).
r2197 CO/BO: Monitoring word 1 Min: - Level

P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Monitoring word 1 which indicates the state of monitor functions. Each bit represents one monitor function.
Bitfields:
Bit00 f_act <= P1080 (f_min) 0 NO 1 YES
Bit01 f_act <= P2155 (f_1) 0 NO 1 YES
Bit02 f_act > P2155 (f_1) 0 NO 1 YES
Bit03 f_act > zero 0 NO 1 YES

Bit04 f_act >= setp. (f_set) 0 NO 1 YES

Bit05 f_act <= P2167 (f_off) 0 NO 1 YES
Bit06 f_act >= P1082 (f_max) 0 NO 1 YES
Bit07 f_act == setp. (f_set) 0 NO 1 YES

Bit08 Act. current r0027 > P2170 0 NO 1 YES

Bit09 Act. unfilt. Vdc < P2172 0 NO 1 YES
Bit10 Act. unfilt. Vdc > P2172 0 NO 1 YES
Bit11 Load missing 0 NO 1 YES

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 131
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

3.31 Technology controller (PID controller)

P2200 BI: Enable PID controller Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
2
Allows user to enable/disable the PID controller.

P2200 settings :
0 : PID controller de-activated
1 : PID controller permanently activated
BICO parameters : PID controller event-controlled, de-activated/activated

PID

P2280
P2285
P2257
P2258

P2261
MOP

r2273

r2294
P2254 P2291 0
ADC Motor
PID PID PID control
P2253 PID 1
PID SUM RFG PT1
FF

P2269
P2270
PID P2292
USS PIDOutput
P2267
BOP link
USS PID PID
P2264
COM link PT1 SCL

CB P2265 P2268 P2271

COM link P2200

Common Settings:
Parameter Parameter text Setting Meaning
P2200 BI: Enable PID controller 0 PID controller de-activated
1.0 PID controller always active
722.x Digital input x
BICO BICO parameter
P2253 CI: PID setpoint 2224 Fixed PID setpoint (PID-FF)
2250 PID-MOP
2015.1 USS on BOP link
2019.1 USS on COM link
2050.1 CB on COM link
P2264 CI: PID feedback 755.0 Analog input
Dependency:
Setting 1 automatically disables normal ramp times set in P1120 and P1121 and the normal frequency
setpoints.

Following an OFF1 or OFF3 command, however, the inverter frequency will ramp down to zero using the
ramp time set in P1121 (P1135 for OFF3).
Note:
The PID setpoint source is selected using P2253. The PID setpoint and the PID feedback signal are
interpreted as [%] values (not [Hz]). The output of the PID controller is displayed as [%] and then normalized
into [Hz] through P2000 (reference frequency) when PID is enabled.

In level 3, the PID controller source enable can also come from the digital inputs in settings 722.0 to 722.2
for DIN1 to DIN3 or from any other BiCo source.

The minimum and maximum motor frequencies (P1080 and P1082) as well as the skip frequencies (P1091
to P1094) remain active on the inverter output. However, enabling skip frequencies with PID control can
produce instabilities.

Changes in parameter P2200 are only activated on the next ON command!

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

132 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P2201 Fixed PID setpoint 1 Min: -200.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.00
200.00
2
Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 1

There are three options available for selection of the PID fixed setpoints:
1. Direct selection
2. Direct selection + ON command
3. Binary coded selection + ON command

1. Direct selection (P0701 - P0706 = 15):

- In this mode of operation, 1 digital input selects one PID fixed setpoint.
- If several inputs are active together, the selected setpoints are summed.
- E.g.: PID-FF1 + PID-FF2 + PID-FF3.

2. Direct selection + ON command (P0701 - P0706 = 16):

- In this mode of operation the PID fixed setpoints are combined with an ON command.
- Description as for 1), except that this type of selection issues an ON command concurrent with any
setpoint selection.
- If several inputs are active together, the selected setpoints are summed.
- E.g.: PID-FF1 + PID-FF2 + PID-FF3.

3. Binary coded selection + ON command (P0701 - P0706 = 17):

- Using this method to select the fixed PID setpoint (FF-PID) allows you to choose up to 8 different
PID setpoints.
- The setpoints are selected according to the following table:
Example:

Direct selection of PID-FF1 P2201 via DIN 1:

....

Dependency:
P2200 = 1 required in user access level 2 to enable setpoint source.
Note:
You may mix different types of frequencies; however, remember that they will be summed if selected
together.

P2201 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 133
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P2202 Fixed PID setpoint 2 Min: -200.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
10.00
200.00
2
Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 2
Details:
See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).
P2203 Fixed PID setpoint 3 Min: -200.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
20.00
200.00
2
Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 3
Details:
See P2201 fixed PID setpoint 1 (FF-PID 1).
P2204 Fixed PID setpoint 4 Min: -200.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
30.00
200.00
2
Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 4
Details:
See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).
P2205 Fixed PID setpoint 5 Min: -200.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
40.00
200.00
2
Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 5
Details:
See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).
P2206 Fixed PID setpoint 6 Min: -200.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
50.00
200.00
2
Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 6
Details:
See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).
P2207 Fixed PID setpoint 7 Min: -200.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
60.00
200.00
2
Defines Fixed PID Setpoint 7
Details:
See P2201 (Fixed PID Setpoint 1).
P2216 Fixed PID setpoint mode - Bit 0 Min: 1 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1
3
3
Fixed frequencies for PID setpoint can be selected in three different modes. Parameter P2216 defines the
mode of selection Bit 0.
Possible Settings:
1 Direct selection
2 Direct selection + ON command
3 Binary coded selection + ON command
P2217 Fixed PID setpoint mode - Bit 1 Min: 1 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 3
1 3
BCD or direct selection Bit 1 for PID setpoint.
Possible Settings:
1 Direct selection
2 Direct selection + ON command
3 Binary coded selection + ON command
P2218 Fixed PID setpoint mode - Bit 2 Min: 1 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1
3
3
BCD or direct selection Bit 2 for PID setpoint.
Possible Settings:
1 Direct selection
2 Direct selection + ON command
3 Binary coded selection + ON command

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

134 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P2220 BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 0 Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
3
Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection Bit 0
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)
P2221 BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 1 Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
3
Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection Bit 1.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
P2222 BI: Fixed PID setp. select Bit 2 Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
3
Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection Bit 2
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
r2224 CO: Act. fixed PID setpoint Min: - Level

P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays total output of PID fixed setpoint selection.
Note:
r2224 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex
P2231 Setpoint memory of PID-MOP Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
1
2
Setpoint memory
Possible Settings:
0 PID-MOP setpoint will not be stored
1 PID-MOP setpoint will be stored (P2240 is updated)
Dependency:
If 0 selected, setpoint returns to value set in P2240 (setpoint of PID-MOP) after an OFF command.

If 1 is selected, active setpoint is "remembered" and P2240 updated with current value.
Details:
See P2240 (setpoint of PID-MOP)
P2232 Inhibit neg. PID-MOP setpoints Min: 0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1
1
2
This parameter suppresses negative setpoints of the PID-MOP output r2250.
Possible Settings:
0 Neg. PID-MOP setpoint is allowed
1 Neg. PID-MOP setpoint inhibited
Note:
Setting 0 enables a change of motor direction using the motor potentiometer setpoint (increase/decrease
frequency either by using digital inputs or motor potentiometer up/down buttons.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 135
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P2235 BI: Enable PID-MOP (UP-cmd) Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
19:13
4000:0
3
Defines source of UP command.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
19.D = Keypad UP button
Dependency:
To change setpoint:
1. Use UP / DOWN key on BOP or
2. Set P0702/P0703 = 13/14 (function of digital inputs 2 and 3)
P2236 BI: Enable PID-MOP (DOWN-cmd) Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: COMMANDS
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
19:14
4000:0
3
Defines source of DOWN command.
Common Settings:
722.0 = Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 = Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2 = Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.3 = Digital input 4 (via analog input, requires P0704 to be set to 99)
19.E = Keypad DOWN button
Dependency:
To change setpoint:
1. Use UP / DOWN key on BOP or
2. Set P0702/P0703 = 13/14 (function of digital inputs 2 and 3)
P2240 Setpoint of PID-MOP Min: -200.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
10.00
200.00
2
Setpoint of the motor potentiometer.

Allows user to set a digital PID setpoint in [%].

Note:
P2240 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex
r2250 CO: Output setpoint of PID-MOP Min: - Level

P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays output setpoint of motor potentiometer in [%].

1
P0840 0
DIN
t
1
BOP
P2235 0
t
USS
1
CB P2236 0
COM link t
%
P1082
⋅ 100 %
P2000

P1080
⋅ 100 %
P2000

t
P1080
− ⋅ 100 %
P2000
f act
⋅ 100 %
r2250 P2000
P1082
− ⋅ 100 %
P2000
Note:
r2250 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

136 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P2253 CI: PID setpoint Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
2
Defines setpoint source for PID setpoint input.

P2280
P2285
P2257
P2258

P2261

r2273

r2294
P2269
P2270
Common Settings:
Parameter Parameter text Setting Meaning
P2200 BI: Enable PID controller 0 PID controller de-activated
1.0 PID controller always active
722.x Digital input x
BICO BICO parameter
P2253 CI: PID setpoint 2224 Fixed PID setpoint (PID-FF)
2250 PID-MOP
2015.1 USS on BOP link
2019.1 USS on COM link
2050.1 CB on COM link
P2264 CI: PID feedback 755.0 Analog input

P2254 CI: PID trim source Min: 0:0 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0:0
4000:0
3
Selects trim source for PID setpoint. This signal is multiplied by the trim gain and added to the PID setpoint.
Common Settings:
See parameter P2253
P2255 PID setpoint gain factor Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def: 100.00
Max: 100.00
3
Gain factor for PID setpoint. The PID setpoint input is multiplied by this gain factor to produce a suitable
ratio between setpoint and trim.
P2256 PID trim gain factor Min: 0.00 Level
CStat:
P-Group: TECH
CUT Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def: 100.00
Max: 100.00
3
Gain factor for PID trim. This gain factor scales the trim signal, which is added to the main PID setpoint.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 137
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P2257 Ramp-up time for PID setpoint Min: 0.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1.00
650.00
2
Sets the ramp-up time for the PID setpoint.

PID Setpoint (%)

100 %

x2

x1

t (s) x 2 − x1
0 t12 t12 = ⋅ P2257
P2257 100%
Dependency:
P2200 = 1 (PID control is enabled) disables normal ramp-up time (P1120).

PID ramp time effective only on PID setpoint and only active
- when PID setpoint is changed or
- when RUN command is given.
Notice:
Setting the ramp-up time too short may cause the inverter to trip, on overcurrent for example.
P2258 Ramp-down time for PID setpoint Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1.00
650.00
2
Sets ramp-down time for PID setpoint.

x1 − x 2
t 21 = ⋅ P2258
100%
Dependency:
- P2200 = 1 (PID control is enabled) disables normal ramp-up time (P1120).
- PID setpoint ramp effective only on PID setpoint changes.
- P1121 (ramp-down time) and P1135 (OFF3 ramp-down time) define the ramp times used after OFF1
and OFF3 respectively.
Notice:
Setting the ramp-down time too short can cause the inverter to trip on overvoltage (F0002) / overcurrent
(F0001).
r2260 CO: PID setpoint after PID-RFG Min: - Level

P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max: -
- 2
Displays total active PID setpoint after PID-RFG in [%].
Note:
r2260 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

138 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P2261 PID setpoint filter timeconstant Min: 0.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0.00
60.00
3
Sets a time constant for smoothing the PID setpoint.
Note:
0 = no smoothing
r2262 CO: Filtered PID setp. after RFG Min: - Level

P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max:
-
-
3
Displays the filtered PID setpoint after the PID ramp-function generator (PID_HLG) as percentage.
Parameter r2262 is obtained from the filtered parameter r2260 that is filtered using the PT1 filter with time
constant P2261.
Note:
r2262 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex
P2264 CI: PID feedback Min: 0:0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: U32
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
755:0
4000:0
2
Selects the source of the PID feedback signal.
Common Settings:
Parameter Parameter text Setting Meaning
P2200 BI: Enable PID controller 0 PID controller de-activated
1.0 PID controller always active
722.x Digital input x
BICO BICO parameter
P2253 CI: PID setpoint 2224 Fixed PID setpoint (PID-FF)
2250 PID-MOP
2015.1 USS on BOP link
2019.1 USS on COM link
2050.1 CB on COM link
P2264 CI: PID feedback 755.0 Analog input
Note:
When analog input is selected, offset and gain can be implemented using parameters P0756 to P0760.
P2265 PID feedback filter timeconstant Min: 0.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def: 0.00
Max: 60.00
2
Defines time constant for PID feedback filter.
r2266 CO: PID filtered feedback Min: - Level

P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays PID feedback signal in [%].
Note:
r2266 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex
P2267 Max. value for PID feedback Min: -200.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
100.00
200.00
3
Sets the upper limit for the value of the feedback signal in [%].
Note:
- P2267 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex
- When PID is enabled (P2200 = 1) and the signal rises above this value, the inverter will trip with F0222 .
P2268 Min. value for PID feedback Min: -200.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def: 0.00
Max: 200.00
3
Sets lower limit for value of feedback signal in [%].
Note:
- P2268 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex
- When PID is enabled (P2200 = 1) and the signal rises below this value, the inverter will trip with F0221.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 139
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P2269 Gain applied to PID feedback Min: 0.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
100.00
500.00
3
Allows the user to scale the PID feedback as a percentage value [%].

A gain of 100.0 % means that feedback signal has not changed from its default value.
P2270 PID feedback function selector Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
3
3
Applies mathematical functions to the PID feedback signal, allowing multiplication of the result by P2269
(gain applied to PID feedback).
Possible Settings:
0 Disabled
1 Square root (root(x))
2 Square (x*x)
3 Cube (x*x*x)
P2271 PID transducer type Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: U16
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 1
0 2
Allows the user to select the transducer type for the PID feedback signal.
Possible Settings:
0 Disabled
1 Inversion of PID feedback signal
Notice:
It is essential that you select the correct tranducer type.

If you are unsure whether 0 or 1 is applicable, you can determine the correct type as follows:
1. Disable the PID function (P2200 = 0).
2. Increase the motor frequency while measuring the feedback signal.
3. If the feedback signal increases with an increase in motor frequency, the PID transducer type should be
0.
4. If the feedback signal decreases with an increase in motor frequency the PID transducer type should be
set to 1.
r2272 CO: PID scaled feedback Min: - Level

P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max: -
- 2
Displays PID scaled feedback signal in [%].
Note:
r2272 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex
r2273 CO: PID error Min: - Level

P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max:
-
-
2
Displays PID error (difference) signal between setpoint and feedback signals in [%].
Note:
r2273 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

140 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

P2280 PID proportional gain Min: 0.000 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
3.000
65.000
2
Allows user to set proportional gain for PID controller.

The PID controller is implemented using the standard model.

P2293

P2291

P2280 P2285

Kp Tn y

PID + x Motor
setpoint control
-
r2262 r2273 r2294

y P2292
P2267
PID x
feedback r2272
P2268 P2293

For best results, enable both P and I terms.

Dependency:
P2280 = 0 (P term of PID = 0):
I term acts on the square of the error signal.

P2285 = 0 (I term of PID = 0):

PID controller acts as a P or PD controller respectively.
Note:
- If the system is prone to sudden step changes in the feedback signal, P term should normally be set to
a small value (0.5) with a faster I term for optimum performance.
P2285 PID integral time Min: 0.000 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def: 0.000
Max: 60.000
2
Sets integral time constant for PID controller.
Details:
See P2280 (PID proportional gain).
P2291 PID output upper limit Min: -200.00 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
100.00
200.00
2
Sets upper limit for PID controller output in [%].
Dependency:
If F max (P1082) is greater than P2000 (reference frequency), either P2000 or P2291 (PID output upper
limit) must be changed to achieve F max.
Note:
P2291 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex (as defined by P2000 (reference frequency)).
P2292 PID output lower limit Min: -200.00 Level
CStat:
P-Group: TECH
CUT Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: %
QuickComm.: No
Def: 0.00
Max: 200.00
2
Sets lower limit for the PID controller output in [%].
Dependency:
A negative value allows bipolar operation of PID controller.
Note:
P2292 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 141
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P2293 Ramp-up /-down time of PID limit Min: 0.00 Level

CStat: CUT
P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float
Active: Immediately
Unit: s
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
1.00
100.00
3
Sets maximum ramp rate on output of PID.

When PI is enabled, the output limits are ramped up from 0 to the limits set in P2291 (PID output upper
limit) and P2292 (PID output lower limit). Limits prevent large step changes appearing on the output of the
PID when the inverter is started. Once the limits have been reached, the PID controller output is
instantaneous.

These ramp times are used whenever a RUN command is issued.

Note:
If an OFF1 or OFF 3 are issued, the inverter output frequency ramps down as set in P1121 (ramp-down
time) or P1135 (OFF3 ramp-down time).
r2294 CO: Act. PID output Min: - Level

P-Group: TECH
Datatype: Float Unit: % Def:
Max: -
- 2
Displays PID output in [%]
Note:
r2294 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

142 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Parameter Description

3.32 Inverter parameters

P3900 End of quick commissioning Min: 0 Level

CStat: C
P-Group: QUICK
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: Yes
Def:
Max:
0
3
1
Performs calculations necessary for optimized motor operation.

After completion of calculation, P3900 and P0010 (parameter groups for commissioning) are automatically
reset to their original value 0.
Possible Settings:
0 No quick commissioning
1 Start quick commissioning with factory reset
2 Start quick commissioning
3 Start quick commissioning only for motor data
Dependency:
Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning)
Note:
P3900 = 1 :
When setting 1 is selected, only the parameter settings carried out via the commissioning menu "Quick
commissioning", are retained; all other parameter changes, including the I/O settings, are lost. Motor
calculations are also performed.

P3900 = 2 :
When setting 2 is selected, only those parameters, which depend on the parameters in the commissioning
menu "Quick commissioning" (P0010 = 1) are calculated. The I/O settings are also reset to default and the
motor calculations performed.

P3900 = 3 :
When setting 3 is selected, only the motor and controller calculations are performed. Exiting quick
commissioning with this setting saves time (for example, if only motor rating plate data have been changed).

Calculates a variety of motor parameters, overwriting previous values (see parameter P0340, setting P0340
= 1).
P3950 Access of hidden parameters Min: 0 Level
CStat: CUT
P-Group: ALWAYS
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def: 0
Max: 255
4
Accesses special parameters for development (expert only) and factory functionality (calibration parameter).
r3954[13] CM version and GUI ID Min: - Level

P-Group: -
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max: -
- 4
Used to classify firmware (only for SIEMENS internal purposes).
Index:
r3954[0] : CM version (major release)
r3954[1] : CM version (minor release)
r3954[2] : CM version (baselevel or patch)
r3954[3] : GUI ID
r3954[4] : GUI ID
r3954[5] : GUI ID
r3954[6] : GUI ID
r3954[7] : GUI ID
r3954[8] : GUI ID
r3954[9] : GUI ID
r3954[10] : GUI ID
r3954[11] : GUI ID major release
r3954[12] : GUI ID minor release

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 143
Parameter Description Issue 10/06

P3980 Commissioning command selection Min: 0 Level

CStat: T
P-Group: -
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max:
0
67
4
Toggles command and setpoint sources between freely programmable BICO parameters and fixed
command/setpoint profiles for commissioning.

The command and setpoint sources can be changed independently. The tens digit selects the command
source, the ones digit the setpoint source.
Possible Settings:
0 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = BICO parameter
1 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = MOP setpoint
2 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint
3 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Fixed frequency
4 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS on BOP link
5 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS on COM link
6 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = CB on COM link
7 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog 2 setp
10 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = BICO parameter
11 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = MOP setpoint
12 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint
13 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Fixed frequency
15 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = USS on COM link
16 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = CB on COM link
17 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog 2 setp
40 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = BICO parameter
41 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = MOP setpoint
42 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = Analog setpoint
43 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = Fixed frequency
44 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = USS on BOP link
45 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = USS on COM link
46 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = CB on COM link
47 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = Analog 2 setp
50 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = BICO parameter
51 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = MOP setpoint
52 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = Analog setpoint
53 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = Fixed frequency
54 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = USS on BOP link
55 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = USS on COM link
57 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = Analog 2 setp
60 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = BICO parameter
61 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = MOP setpoint
62 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = Analog setpoint
63 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = Fixed frequency
64 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = USS on BOP link
66 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = CB on COM link
67 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = Analog 2 setp
P3981 Reset active fault Min: 0 Level
CStat: CT
P-Group: ALARMS
Datatype: U16
Active: first confirm
Unit: -
QuickComm.: No
Def:
Max: 1
0 4
Resets active faults when changed from 0 to 1.
Possible Settings:
0 No fault reset
1 Reset fault
Note:
Automatically reset to 0.
Details:
See r0947 (last fault code)
r3986[2] Number of parameters Min: - Level

P-Group: -
Datatype: U16 Unit: - Def:
Max:
-
-
4
Number of parameters on the drive
Index:
r3986[0] : Read only
r3986[1] : Read & write

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

144 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
 Explanation of symbols used in the function diagrams
4
Setting parameters
Summation
ParName
Issue 10/06

Parameter text Filter element

Min ... Max [Dim] Minimum ... Maximum value [Unit] Multiplication
PNumber.C/D [3] (Default) Parameter number.Command/Drive data set [Number indexes] (Default)
x
y Division

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Gain element
1
Monitoring parameters
Switch y
ParName [Dim] Parameter text [Unit]
0
PNumber.C/D [3] Parameter number.Command/Drive data set [Number indexes]
x
00 Integrator
01
Selection switch (1 out of 4)

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

BICO parameters 10
11 Kp Tn
Binector input (Setting parameter)
ParName [Dim] Parameter text [Unit] PI controller
T 0
PNum.C/D Parameter number ON delay
(Default) (Default)

Binector output (Monitoring parameter) 0 T

ParName
OFF delay
Parameter text
Differentiator
PNum Parameter number
T1 T2 ON and OFF delay
Function Diagrams

Connector input (Setting parameter)

ParName Parameter text
PNum.C/D [3] Parameter number [Number indexes] Limitation
(Default) (Default) & AND gate

Connector output (Monitoring parameter)

ParName [Hz] Parameter text [Unit]
PNum [3] Parameter number [Number indexes] 1 OR gate Limitation

Connector/Binector output (Monitoring parameter)

ParName Parameter text
1 NOT gate Characteristic
PNum Parameter number
PNum
NOT gate

A 1
A/D converter Hysteresis
D 0
{

D
D/A converter
A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0010_Symbols.vsd Function diagram
- 10 -
Symbols in funktion diagrams 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

145
146
External Internal Technology Setpoint channel Motor control Modulator
interfaces setpoint functions
source

DIN 2000 JOG 4100 - 4180

Monitoring
Function Diagrams

5000 5200 5300 6100

DOUT 2100 MOP 3100 Braking

ADC 2200 FF 3200 Restart

V/f control
5000
SUM setpoint

/J
DAC 2300 Flying Restart

MF A
GF R
DOM

MUS GO
5100

noi t c el es
PID controller

2400 4600
BOP Vdc_max
Control

Motor identification
2500 - 2510 3300
USS Fixed
BOP link PID setpoint

2600 - 2610 3400

USS PID
MOP Motor and inverter protection, Adaption of motor parameters
COM link

2700 - 2710
CB Sequence control
COM link

Parameterization

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Overview 1100_Overview.vsd Function diagram
- 1100 -
General Overview 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
 CO/BO: Bin.inp.val BI: Enable JOG ->
r0722 P1055
DIN (0:0)
r0722
BI: Enable JOG <-
BI: Fct. of DOUT 1
P1056
P0731 CI: Add. setpoint
Issue 10/06

(0:0)
DOUT (52:3)
P1075 JOG frequency -> BI: ON/OFF1
BI: Enable MOP(UP) (0:0) 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] P0840
P1035 P1058 (5.00)
CO:ADC scal[4000h] CI: Add. setp.scal (722:0)

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
(19:13) CO: MOP outp.freq. [Hz] JOG frequency <-
ADC r0755 P1076 BI:ON/OFF1 reverse
BI:Enable MOP(DWN) MOP r1050 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
(1:0) P0842
P1059 (5.00)
CI: DAC P1036 BI: Disab.add.setp (0:0)
P0771 (19:14) SUM SUM/
P1074 BI: 1. OFF2
DAC (21:0) (0:0) JOG
selection P0844
CI: Main setp scal CO: Tot. freq.setp [Hz] (1:0)
BI: FF sel. Bit 0

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

CO/BO: BOP CtrlWd P1071 r1078
P1020 BI: 2. OFF2
r0019 (0:0) (1:0) AFM P0845
BOP 0 RFG
r0019 CI: Main setpoint (19:1)
BI: FF sel. Bit 1 V/f
CO: PZD<-COM (USS) P1021 CO: Act. FF [Hz] P1070 0 FOC Sequence
1
r2018 [4] (0:0) FF r1024 (755:0) Imax BI: 1. OFF3
0 contr. control
BO: CtrlWd1 <- COM 0
BI: FF sel. Bit 2 . P0848
r2036 . (1:0)
P1022 1 BI: Inh. neg. setp .
USS BO: CtrlWd2 <- COM (0:0) BI: 2. OFF3
(COM-link) P1110
RS485 r2037 CO: Act.PID output [%] P0849
(0:0)
CI: PZD->COM (USS) CI: PID setpoint r2294 (1:0)
BI: Reverse
P2019 [4] P2253 BI: Pulse enable
(0:0) P1113
(52:0) P0852
PID (722:1)
CO: PZD from CB BI:PID setp->Bit 0 CI:PID trim source (1:0)
controller BI: RFG enable
r2050 [4] P2220 P2254
(0:0) P1140
BO: CtrlWd1 <- CB (0:0)
(1:0)
r2090 BI:PID setp->Bit 1 CI: PID feedback .
CB BO: CtrlWd2 <- CB P2221 CO: Fixed.PID setp [%] .
FF P2264 . CO/BO: Act StatWd1
(COM-link) r2091 (0:0) r2224 (755:0)
PID r0052
CI: PZD to CB BI:PID setp->Bit 2 r0052
BI: Enab. PID ctrl
P2051 [4] P2222 CO/BO: Act StatWd2
P2200
(52:0) (0:0) r0053
(0:0)
CO: PZD<-BOP (USS) r0053
r2015 [4] CO/BO: Act CtrlWd1
BO: CtrlWd1 <- BOP r0054
r2032 BI: PID-MOP (UP)
r0054
USS BO: CtrlWd2 <- BOP P2235
(BOP-link) CO/BO: Add. CtrlWd
(19:13) CO: MOP outp. setp [%]
RS232 r2033 PID r0055
BI: PID-MOP (DWN) r2250
CI: PZD->BOP (USS) MOP r0055
P2016 [4] P2236 .
(52:0) (19:14) .
.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Overview 1200_BICO_Overv.vsd Function diagram
- 1200 -
Connection of External and Internal Setpoints 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

147
148
P24 or 0V
(KL8) (KL9)

PNP/NPN DIN Debounce time: DIN

24 V 0 ... 1 0 ... 3
P0725 (1)
Function Diagrams

P0724 (3)
KL5 0 24 V
T 0

1 &
0V

24 V Debounce time: DIN

0 ... 3
P0724 (3)
KL6 0 24 V
T 0 CO/BO: Bin.inp.val
r0722
1 & r0722.0
r0722.1
r0722.2
0V

24 V Debounce time: DIN

0 ... 3
P0724 (3)
KL7 0 24 V
T 0

1 &
0V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2000_DIN.vsd Function diagram
- 2000 -
Digital Inputs 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
 Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
Invert DOUTs
0 ... 1
P0748 (0) CO/BO: State DOUTs
r0747
BI: Fct. of DOUT 1 r0747.0
P0731 0
(52:3)
1
-1 COM
Kl.10
NO
Kl.11

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2100_DOUT.vsd Function diagram
- 2100 -
Digital Outputs 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

149
150
Type of ADC Value x1:ADC scal. Value x2:ADC scal. ADC deadband width
0 ... 1 0 ... 10 [V] 0 ... 10 [V] 0 ... 10 [V]
P0756 (0) P0757 (0) P0759 (10) P0761 (0)

%
Function Diagrams

100 %

ASPmax 4000 h
Value y2:ADC scal. ADC after scal.[%] [%]
-99999.9 ... 99999.9 [%] y2 r0754
Smooth time ADC P0760 (100.0)
0 ... 10000 [ms]

01 V
P0753 (3) Value y1:ADC scal. y1
-99999.9 ... 99999.9 [%]
P0758 (0.0) V
A xd x1 x2 10 V x100% CO:ADC scal[4000h]
ASPmin r0755

D
Analog input

Digit
Act. ADC input [V]
r0752
Volts

Type of ADC
Delay on sig. loss
0 ... 1 CO/BO: ADC stat Wd
50 % of P0761 0 ... 10000 [ms]
P0756 (0)
P0762 (10) r0751
r0751
0
T Warning, signal lost
(F0080)
1

CO/BO: Bin.inp.val
1
r0722
r0722.3
0
1.7 4 V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2200_ADC.vsd Function diagram
- 2200 -
Analog Input (ADC) 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
 Issue 10/06

Type of DAC DAC deadband width

0 ... 0 0 ... 20
P0776 (0) P0781 (0)

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Value x1:DAC scal. Value x2:DAC scal.
-99999.0 ... 99999.0 [%] -99999.0 ... 99999.0 [%]
P0777 (0.0) P0779 (100.0)

mA

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

y100%

20 mA 4000 h 20 mA

Value y2:DAC scal.

0 ... 20 y2 Act. DAC value[mA]
Smooth time DAC P0780 (20) r0774
0 ... 1000 [ms] Enable ab. value
Value y1:DAC scal.
P0773 (2) 0 ... 1 y1
0 ... 20
P0775 (0)
P0778 (0)
CI: DAC P0781 Analog output
P0771 D
x(t)
(21:0) %
x1 x2 x20mA 100 %
A

CO/BO: DAC stat Wd

1 r0785
0 r0785

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2300_DAC.vsd Function diagram
- 2300 -
Analog Output (DAC) 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

151
 Operating display (r0000) Note:

152
selected and operation=1 Activation of the raise and lower keys is only effective if the operating display (r0000)
is selected, a changeover to the value display has taken place with the toggle key and the
of sequence control
unit is in the "Operation" status.
CO/BO: BOP CtrlWd
0 0
r0019 .D Raise motor potentio-
5V r0019 .D meter from BOP
1
CO/BO: BOP CtrlWd
0
0
r0019 .E Lower motor poten-
5V r0019 .E tiometer from BOP
Function Diagrams

Fn
Toggle key to operating
5V
Fn system,
Basic Operator Panel BOP fault acknowledgement
P
5V Access parameters
P

Actuation of seven-
segment display
Seven-segment
display
CO/BO: BOP CtrlWd
SET r0019 .B Positive direction of
Raise key & 1 (Q=1) r0019 .B rotation from BOP
Toggle key
Reversing key POWER ON
ON key 5V
RESET Priority
& (Q=0) 1 RESET
2 SET
OFF key
JOG key
Program key
Lower key
jog

CO/BO: BOP CtrlWd

Set command
1 SET r0019 .1 ON/OFF1, OFF2, OFF3
5V 1 (Q=1) r0019 .1 from BOP
1
0
5V RESET Priority
0 Reset command (Q=0)
1 1 RESET
2 SET
POWER ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2400_BOP.vsd Function diagram
- 2400 -
Basic Operator Panel (BOP) 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
 Bit00 ON/OFF1
Bit01 OFF2: Electrical stop
Bit02 OFF3: Fast stop
Issue 10/06

Bit03 Pulse enable

RxD Receive telegram Receive Bit04 RFG enable
Bit05 RFG start
PZD PKW Bit06 Setpoint enable

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
BCC PKW ADR LGE STX BO: CtrlWd1 <- BOP
3 2 1 0 Bit07 Fault acknowledge
r2032 Bit08 JOG right
PZD r2015 Bit09 JOG left
[0] Bit10 Control from PLC
0
Bit11 Reverse (setpoint inversion)
1 [1] Bit13 Motor potentiometer MOP up
2 [2] Bit14 Motor potentiometer MOP down
Bit15 CDS Bit 0 (Local/Remote)

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

3 [3]

Bit00 Fixed frequency Bit 0

Bit01 Fixed frequency Bit 1
Bit02 Fixed frequency Bit 2
BO: CtrlWd2 <- BOP Bit03 Fixed frequency Bit 3
r2033 Bit04 Drive data set (DDS) Bit 0
Change par. via Bit05 Drive data set (DDS) Bit 1
Bit2 = 1 0 ... 15 Bit08 PID enabled
P0927 (15) Bit09 DC brake enabled
Bit11 Droop
USS baudrate Bit12 Torque control
3 ... 9 Bit13 External fault 1
P2010 [2] (6) Bit15 Command data set (CDS) Bit 1
Note:
USS address Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word of the
0 ... 31 telegram received via USS so that the converter will
P2011 [2] (0) accept the process data as
USS
configuration being valid. For this reason, the control word 1
USS PZD length must be transferred to the converter in the first
All parameters: PZD word.
0 ... 4
Index = 1
P2012 [2] (2)
=> BOP link
USS PKW length
0 ... 127
P2013 [2] (127)

USS telegram T_off

0 ... 65535 [ms]
P2014 [2] (0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2500_USSonBOP.vsd Function diagram
- 2500 -
USS on BOP link, Receiving 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

153
154
Bit00 Drive ready
Bit01 Drive ready to run
Bit02 Drive running
Bit03 Drive fault active
Bit04 OFF2 active
Bit05 OFF3 active
Transmit Transmit telegram TxD
Bit06 ON inhibit active PKW
CO/BO: Act StatWd1
Bit07 Drive warning active PZD
r0052
Function Diagrams

Bit08 Deviation setpoint / act. value BCC PKW ADR LGE STX
Bit09 PZD control r0052 3 2 1 0
P2016 PZD
Bit10 Maximum frequency reached
Bit11 Warning: Motor current limit CO: Act. frequency [Hz] [0] 0
Bit12 Motor holding brake active r0021 [1] 1
Bit13 Motor overload [2] 2
Bit14 Motor runs right
Bit15 Inverter overload [3] 3

Bit00 DC brake active

Bit01 Act. freq. r0021 > P2167 (f_off) Note:
Bit02 Act. freq. r0021 > P1080 (f_min) P2016[0] = 52
Bit03 Act. current r0027 >= P2170 CO/BO: Act StatWd2 P2016[1] = 21
Bit04 Act. freq. r0021 >= P2155 (f_1) P2016[3] = 53
r0053
Bit05 Act. freq. r0021 < P2155 (f_1) are default settings
r0053
Bit06 Act. freq. r0021 >= setpoint
Bit07 Act. Vdc r0026 < P2172 Change par. via
Bit2 = 1 0 ... 15
Bit08 Act. Vdc r0026 > P2172
Bit09 Ramping finished P0927 (15)
Bit10 PID output r2294 == P2292 (PID_min)
Bit11 PID output r2294 == P2291 (PID_max) USS baudrate
Bit14 Download data set 0 from AOP 3 ... 9
Bit15 Download data set 1 from AOP P2010 [2] (6)

USS address
0 ... 31
P2011 [2] (0)
USS
configuration
USS PZD length
All
0 ... 4
parameters:
P2012 [2] (2)
Index = 1
=> BOP link
USS PKW length
0 ... 127
P2013 [2] (127)

USS telegram T_off

0 ... 65535 [ms]
P2014 [2] (0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2510_USSonBOP.vsd Function diagram
- 2510 -
USS on BOP link, Transmitting 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
 Bit00 ON/OFF1
Bit01 OFF2: Electrical stop
Issue 10/06

Bit02 OFF3: Fast stop

Bit03 Pulse enable
RxD Receive telegram Receive Bit04 RFG enable
Bit05 RFG start

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
PZD PKW Bit06 Setpoint enable
BCC PKW ADR LGE STX BO: CtrlWd1 <- COM
3 2 1 0 Bit07 Fault acknowledge
r2036 Bit08 JOG right
PZD r2018 Bit09 JOG left
[0] Bit10 Control from PLC
0
Bit11 Reverse (setpoint inversion)
1 [1] Bit13 Motor potentiometer MOP up
2 [2] Bit14 Motor potentiometer MOP down

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

[3] Bit15 CDS Bit 0 (Local/Remote)
3

Bit00 Fixed frequency Bit 0

Bit01 Fixed frequency Bit 1
Bit02 Fixed frequency Bit 2
BO: CtrlWd2 <- COM Bit03 Fixed frequency Bit 3
r2037 Bit04 Drive data set (DDS) Bit 0
Change par. via Bit05 Drive data set (DDS) Bit 1
Bit3 = 1 0 ... 15 Bit08 PID enabled
P0927 (15) Bit09 DC brake enabled
Bit11 Droop
USS baudrate Bit12 Torque control
3 ... 9 Bit13 External fault 1
P2010 [2] (6) Bit15 Command data set (CDS) Bit 1
Note:
USS address Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word of the
0 ... 31 telegram received via USS so that the converter will
P2011 [2] (0) accept the process data as
USS
configuration being valid. For this reason, the control word 1
USS PZD length must be transferred to the converter in the first
All parameters: PZD word.
0 ... 4
Index = 0
P2012 [2] (2)
=> COM link
USS PKW length
0 ... 127
P2013 [2] (127)

USS telegram T_off

0 ... 65535 [ms]
P2014 [2] (0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2600_USSonCOM.vsd Function diagram
- 2600 -
USS on COM link, Receiving 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

155
156
Bit00 Drive ready
Bit01 Drive ready to run
Bit02 Drive running
Bit03 Drive fault active
Bit04 OFF2 active
Bit05 OFF3 active
Transmit Transmit telegram TxD
Bit06 ON inhibit active PKW
Bit07 Drive warning active CO/BO: Act StatWd1
PZD
Bit08 Deviation setpoint / act. value r0052 BCC PKW ADR LGE STX
Function Diagrams

Bit09 PZD control 3 2 1 0

r0052 PZD
Bit10 Maximum frequency reached P2019
Bit11 Warning: Motor current limit CO: Act. frequency [Hz] [0] 0
Bit12 Motor holding brake active r0021 [1] 1
Bit13 Motor overload [2] 2
Bit14 Motor runs right
Bit15 Inverter overload [3] 3

Bit00 DC brake active

Bit01 Act. freq. r0021 > P2167 (f_off)
Bit02 Act. freq. r0021 > P1080 (f_min)
Bit03 Act. current r0027 >= P2170 CO/BO: Act StatWd2
Bit04 Act. freq. r0021 >= P2155 (f_1) r0053
Bit05 Act. freq. r0021 < P2155 (f_1)
r0053
Bit06 Act. freq. r0021 >= setpoint
Bit07 Act. Vdc r0026 < P2172 Change par. via
Note: Bit3 = 1 0 ... 15
Bit08 Act. Vdc r0026 > P2172
Bit09 Ramping finished P2019[0] = 52 P0927 (15)
Bit10 PID output r2294 == P2292 (PID_min) P2019[1] = 21
Bit11 PID output r2294 == P2291 (PID_max) P2019[3] = 53
USS baudrate
Bit14 Download data set 0 from AOP are default settings
3 ... 9
Bit15 Download data set 1 from AOP P2010 [2] (6)

USS address
0 ... 31
P2011 [2] (0)
USS
configuration
USS PZD length
All parameters:
0 ... 4
Index = 0
P2012 [2] (2)
=> COM link
USS PKW length
0 ... 127
P2013 [2] (127)

USS telegram T_off

0 ... 65535 [ms]
P2014 [2] (0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2610_USSonCOM.vsd Function diagram
- 2610 -
USS on COM link, Transmitting 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
 Issue 10/06

Bit00 ON/OFF1
Bit01 OFF2: Electrical stop
Bit02 OFF3: Fast stop
Bit03 Pulse enable
Bit04 RFG enable

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
RxD Receive telegram Receive
Bit05 RFG start
PZD PKW Bit06 Setpoint enable
CB-Frame PKW CB-Frame BO: CtrlWd1 <- CB
3 2 1 0 Bit07 Fault acknowledge
r2090 Bit08 JOG right
PZD r2050 Bit09 JOG left
[0] Bit10 Control from PLC
0
Bit11 Reverse (setpoint inversion)
1 [1] Bit13 Motor potentiometer MOP up

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

2 [2] Bit14 Motor potentiometer MOP down
[3] Bit15 CDS Bit 0 (Local/Remote)
3

Bit00 Fixed frequency Bit 0

Bit01 Fixed frequency Bit 1
Bit02 Fixed frequency Bit 2
BO: CtrlWd2 <- CB Bit03 Fixed frequency Bit 3
r2091 Bit04 Drive data set (DDS) Bit 0
Bit05 Drive data set (DDS) Bit 1
Bit08 PID enabled
Bit09 DC brake enabled
Bit11 Droop
Bit12 Torque control
Bit13 External fault 1
Bit15 Command data set (CDS) Bit 1
Note:
Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word of the
Bit0 = 1 Change par. via
telegram received via USS so that the converter will
0 ... 15
accept the process data as
P0927 (15) being valid. For this reason, the control word 1
must be transferred to the converter in the first
CB tel. off time PZD word.
CB
0 ... 65535 [ms]
configuration
P2040 (20)

CB parameter
0 ... 65535
P2041 [5] (0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2700_CBonCOM.vsd Function diagram
- 2700 -
CB on COM link, Receiving 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

157
158
Bit00 Drive ready
Bit01 Drive ready to run
Bit02 Drive running
Bit03 Drive fault active
Bit04 OFF2 active
Bit05 OFF3 active
Transmit Transmit telegram TxD
Bit06 ON inhibit active PKW
Function Diagrams

CO/BO: Act StatWd1

Bit07 Drive warning active
r0052 CB-Frame PZD PKW CB-Frame
Bit08 Deviation setpoint / act. value
Bit09 PZD control r0052 3 2 1 0
P2051 PZD
Bit10 Maximum frequency reached
Bit11 Warning: Motor current limit CO: Act. frequency [Hz] [0] 0
Bit12 Motor holding brake active r0021 [1] 1
Bit13 Motor overload [2] 2
Bit14 Motor runs right
Bit15 Inverter overload [3] 3

Bit00 DC brake active

Bit01 Act. freq. r0021 > P2167 (f_off)
Bit02 Act. freq. r0021 > P1080 (f_min) Note:
Bit03 Act. current r0027 >= P2170 CO/BO: Act StatWd2 P2051[0] = 52
Bit04 Act. freq. r0021 >= P2155 (f_1) r0053 P2051[1] = 21
Bit05 Act. freq. r0021 < P2155 (f_1) r0053 P2051[3] = 53
Bit06 Act. freq. r0021 >= setpoint are default settings
Bit07 Act. Vdc r0026 < P2172
Bit08 Act. Vdc r0026 > P2172
Bit09 Ramping finished
Bit10 PID output r2294 == P2292 (PID_min)
Bit11 PID output r2294 == P2291 (PID_max)
Bit14 Download data set 0 from AOP
Bit15 Download data set 1 from AOP

Change par. via

Bit0 = 1 0 ... 15
P0927 (15)

CB tel. off time

CB
0 ... 65535 [ms]
configuration
P2040 (20)

CB parameter
0 ... 65535
P2041 [5] (0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces 2710_CBonCOM.vsd Function diagram
- 2710 -
CB on COM link, Transmitting 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
 Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
BI: ON/OFF1
P0840
(722:0)

MOP setpoint MOP setp. memory

-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0 ... 1
BI: Enable MOP(UP) P1040 (5.00) P1031 (0)

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

P1035
(19:13)
MOP output start value
BI:Enable MOP(DWN) control
P1036 Inhib. MOP reverse
(19:14) 0 ... 1
P1032 (1)

0 0

Max. frequency 1 CO: MOP outp.freq. [Hz]

0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0 1
MOP r1050
P1082 (50.00)
& RFG 0
-1 1 0

1 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal Setpoint Source 3100_MOP.vsd Function diagram
- 3100 -
Motor Potentiometer (MOP) 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

159
160
FF mode - Bit 0
1 ... 3 FF mode - Bit 0
P1016 (1) 1 ... 3
BI: FF sel. Bit 0
P1016 (1)
P1020
Function Diagrams

1,2
(0:0) 2
0 3 0 1
FF mode - Bit 1
1 ... 3 FF mode - Bit 1
P1017 (1) 1 ... 3
BI: FF sel. Bit 1
P1017 (1)
P1021
(0:0) 1,2
2
0 3 0 1
FF mode - Bit 2
1 ... 3 FF mode - Bit 2
P1018 (1) 1 ... 3
BI: FF sel. Bit 2 P1018 (1)
P1022
1,2
(0:0) 2
1 ON/OFF1
0 3 0 1

0 0
Fixed frequency 1
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
1
P1001 (0.00)

0 0
Fixed frequency 2
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 1
P1002 (5.00)

0 0 + + CO: Act. FF [Hz]

Fixed frequency 3
r1024
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
1
P1003 (10.00)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal Setpoint Source 3200_FF.vsd Function diagram
- 3200 -
Fixed Frequency (FF) bit coded 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
 FF mode - Bit 0
1 ... 3
BI: FF sel. Bit 0 P1016 (1)
P1020
3
(0:0)
Issue 10/06

0 1,2

FF mode - Bit 1

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
1 ... 3
BI: FF sel. Bit 1 P1017 (1)
P1021
3
(0:0)
0 1: If all FF mode selections equal 3
1,2 (P1016 = P1017 = P1018 = 3)
0: For all other cases

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

FF mode - Bit 2
1 ... 3
BI: FF sel. Bit 2 P1018 (1)
P1022 1
(0:0) 3 1 0 0 ON/OFF1
0 1,2

0 0 0
OFF1
Fixed frequency 1
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0 0 1
P1001 (0.00)
Fixed frequency 2
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0 1 0
P1002 (5.00)

Fixed frequency 3
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0 1 1
CO: Act. FF [Hz]
P1003 (10.00)
r1024
Fixed frequency 4
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 1 0 0
P1004 (15.00)

Fixed frequency 5
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 1 0 1
P1005 (20.00)
Fixed frequency 6
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 1 1 0
P1006 (25.00)
Fixed frequency 7
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 1 1 1
P1007 (30.00)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal Setpoint Source 3210_FF.vsd Function diagram
- 3210 -
Fixed Frequency (FF) binary coded 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

161
162
Fix.PID setp.Bit 0
1 ... 3 Fix.PID setp.Bit 0
P2216 (1) 1 ... 3
BI:PID setp->Bit 0
P2216 (1)
P2220
(0:0) 1,2
2
Function Diagrams

0 3 0 1
Fix.PID setp.Bit 1
1 ... 3 Fix.PID setp.Bit 1
P2217 (1) 1 ... 3
BI:PID setp->Bit 1
P2217 (1)
P2221
1,2
(0:0) 2
0 3 0 1
Fix.PID setp.Bit 2
1 ... 3 Fix.PID setp.Bit 2
P2218 (1) 1 ... 3
BI:PID setp->Bit 2 P2218 (1)
P2222
1,2
(0:0) 2
1 ON/OFF1
0 3 0 1

0 0
Fixed PID setp. 1
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1
P2201 (0.00)

0 0
Fixed PID setp. 2
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1
P2202 (10.00)
0 + + CO: Fixed.PID setp [%]
0
Fixed PID setp. 3 r2224
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%]
1
P2203 (20.00)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal Setpoint Source 3300_FPID.vsd Function diagram
- 3300 -
Fixed PID setpoint, bit coded 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
 Fix.PID setp.Bit 0
1 ... 3
P2216 (1)
BI:PID setp->Bit 0
P2220
3
(0:0)
Issue 10/06

0 1,2

Fix.PID setp.Bit 1
1 ... 3

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
BI:PID setp->Bit 1 P2217 (1)
P2221
(0:0) 3

1: If all FF mode selections equal 3

0 1,2 (P2216 = P2217 = P2218 = 3)
0: For all other cases
Fix.PID setp.Bit 2

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

1 ... 3
BI:PID setp->Bit 2 P2218 (1)
P2222 1
3 1
(0:0)
0 0 ON/OFF1
0 1,2

0 0 0
OFF1
Fixed PID setp. 1
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0 0 1
P2201 (0.00)
Fixed PID setp. 2
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0 1 0
P2202 (10.00)

Fixed PID setp. 3

-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0 1 1
CO: Fixed.PID setp [%]
P2203 (20.00)
r2224
Fixed PID setp. 4
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1 0 0
P2204 (30.00)

Fixed PID setp. 5

-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1 0 1
P2205 (40.00)
Fixed PID setp. 6
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1 1 0
P2206 (50.00)
Fixed PID setp. 7
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1 1 1
P2207 (60.00)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal Setpoint Source 3310_FPID.vsd Function diagram
- 3310 -
Fixed PID setpoint, binary coded 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

163
164
Function Diagrams

Setp. of PID-MOP PID-MOP setp. mem.

-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0 ... 1
BI: PID-MOP (UP) P2240 (10.00) P2231 (0)
P2235
(19:13)
PID-MOP output start value
BI: PID-MOP (DWN) control
P2236 Inhib. PID-MOD rev
(19:14) 0 ... 1
P2232 (1)
Rated frequency
12.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P0310 (50.00) 100 % 0 0

Max. frequency 1 CO: MOP outp. setp [%]

0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] % 0 1
PID-MOP r2250
P1082 (50.00)
RFG 0
-1 1 0

1 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal Setpoint Source 3400_PIDMOP.vsd Function diagram
- 3400 -
PID Motor Potentiometer (PID-MOP) 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
 Issue 10/06

SwOff freq. f_off Delay time T_off

0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz] 0 ... 10000 [ms]
P2167 (1.00) Brake closed P2168 (10)

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
(on ramp down)
CO/BO: Act StatWd2
T 0 r0053
1 1 r0053 .1
|f_act| >= P2167 (f_off) f_act
CO/BO: Monitor Wd1
0 r2197
&

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

r2197 .5
no Brake selected

Min. frequency
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P1080 (0.00)

CO/BO: Act StatWd2

1
|f_act| > P1080 (f_min) f_act r0053
r0053 .2
0
{

CO/BO: Monitor Wd1

r2197
r2197 .0
Hyst. freq. f_hys
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz]
P2150 (3.00)

CO/BO: Act StatWd2

1
|I_act| >= P2170 (I_thresh) I_act 0 T r0053
r0053 .3
0
CO/BO: Monitor Wd1
r2197
Delay time current r2197 .8
0 ... 10000 [ms]
Threshold current
P2171 (10)
0.0 ... 400.0 [%]
P2170 (100.0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4100_SW21.vsd Function diagram
- 4100 -
Monitoring 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

165
 Threshold freq f_1

166
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P2155 (30.00)

CO/BO: Act StatWd2

1 T 0
|f_act| > P2155 (f_1) f_act r0053
r0053 .4
0 Threshold freq f_1

{
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] CO/BO: Monitor Wd1
Function Diagrams

P2155 (30.00) r2197

Delay time of f_1 r2197 .2
0 ... 10000 [ms]
Hyst. freq. f_hys P2156 (10)
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz] CO/BO: Act StatWd2
P2150 (3.00) 1
T 0 r0053
|f_act| <= P2155 (f_1)
r0053 .5
0

{
CO/BO: Monitor Wd1
0 r2197
Delay time of f_1
r2197 .1
0 ... 10000 [ms]
Hyst. freq. f_hys P2156 (10)
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz] CO/BO: Act StatWd2
1 P2150 (3.00)
f_act + r0053
f_act >= f_set
_ r0053 .6
0

{
CO/BO: Monitor Wd1
1 0 r2197
r2197 .4
-1 Hyst. freq. f_hys
f_set 0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz] CO/BO: Act StatWd2
P2150 (3.00) 1
r0053
f_act > 0
r0053 .14
0

{
CO/BO: Monitor Wd1
Vdc delay time
0 ... 10000 [ms] r2197
P2173 (10) r2197 .3
Hyst. freq. f_hys
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz] CO/BO: Act StatWd2
1 P2150 (3.00)
|Vdc_act| < P2172 Vdc_act T 0 r0053
r0053 .7
0 Vdc delay time
0 ... 10000 [ms] CO/BO: Monitor Wd1
P2173 (10) r2197
r2197 .9
Vdc threshold CO/BO: Act StatWd2
0 ... 2000 [V] 0 T r0053
|Vdc_act| > P2172 P2172 (800) r0053 .8
CO/BO: Monitor Wd1
r2197
r2197 .10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4110_SW22.vsd Function diagram
- 4110 -
Monitoring 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
 BI: ON/OFF1 Parameter r0054
P0840 CO/BO: Act CtrlWd1
(722:0) r0054
Bit No. Meaning
BI:ON/OFF1 reverse r0054
BI: 1. OFF2
Issue 10/06

P0842
1 0 = ON/OFF1, Shutdown via ramp, followed by pulse disable
Sequence control 1)
P0844 (0:0) 0 Braking control
(1:0) 1 = ON, operating condition (edge-controlled) Setpoint channel

BI: 2. OFF2 0 = OFF2: Electrical stop, pulse disable, motor coasts down Sequence control 1)

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
1
1 = Operating condition Braking control
P0845 &
(19:1) 0 = OFF3: Fast stop Sequence control 1)
2 Braking control
1 = Operating condition
BI: 1. OFF3 Setpoint channel
BI: Pulse enable P0852
P0848 1 = Pulse enable
(1:0) 3 Sequence control 1)
(1:0) 0 = Pulse disable All bits = 1 --> drive
BI: RFG enable P1140 runs

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

BI: 2. OFF3 1 = RFG enable
(1:0) 4 Setpoint channel
P0849 & 0 = Set RFG to 0
(1:0) BI: RFG start P1141
1 = RFG start
(1:0) 5 Setpoint channel
0 = Stop RFG
BI: 1. Faults ackn
BI:RFG enable setp P1142
P2103 1 = RFG setpoint enable
(1:0) 6 Setpoint channel
(722:2) 0 = Setpoint disable

0 = No
BOP/AOP via "Fn" 7 Sequence control
1 = Fault acknowledge
BI: 2. Faults ackn 1 1)
BI: Enable JOG -> P1055
P2104 0 = NO Sequence control 1)
(0:0) 8
(0:0) 1 = JOG right Setpoint channel
BI: Enable JOG <- P1056
0 = NO Sequence control 1)
(0:0) 9
1 = JOG left Setpoint channel
BI:ON/OFF1 reverse Note:This bit must be set in the first PZD word of the
P0842 1 = Control from PLC telegram received from serial interfaces,
10
0 = No control from PLC so that the converter will accept the process data as
(0:0)
being valid (compare USS, PROFIBUS, etc.)
BI: Reverse 1 = Reverse (setpoint inversion)
11 Setpoint channel
1 0 = Revers disabled
P1113
(722:1)
Seven-segment display 12 reserved
Segment Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
BI: Enable MOP(UP) P1035
0 = NO
(19:13) 13 Setpoint channel
1 = Motor potentiometer MOP up
BI:Enable MOP(DWN) P1036
0 = NO
(19:14) 14 Setpoint channel
1 = Motor potentiometer MOP down
BI: CDS b0 loc/rem P0810
0 = NO Sequence control 1)
(0:0) 15
1 = CDS Bit 0 (local/remote)
1) The sequence control is the internal
control (software) for realizing the
Segment Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 inverter status (r0001)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4150_STW1.vsd Function diagram
- 4150 -
Control word 1 (r0054) 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

167
168
Parameter r0055 CO/BO: Add. CtrlWd
r0055
Bit No. Meaning r0055

BI: FF sel. Bit 0 P1020

0 = NO
(0:0) 0 Fixed frequencies
1 = Fixed frequency Bit 0
BI: FF sel. Bit 1 P1021
0 = NO
Function Diagrams

(0:0) 1 Fixed frequencies

1 = Fixed frequency Bit 1
BI: FF sel. Bit 2 P1022
0 = NO
(0:0) 2 Fixed frequencies
1 = Fixed frequency Bit 2

3 reserved

4 reserved

5 reserved

6 reserved

7 reserved

BI: Enab. PID ctrl P2200

0 = NO
(0:0) 8 PID control
1 = PID enabled
BI: Enable DC brk. P1230
0 = NO
(0:0) 9 DC braking control
1 = DC brake enabled

10 reserved

11 reserved

Seven-segment display 12 reserved

Segment Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
BI: External fault P2106
0 = External fault 1
(1:0) 13 Sequence control 1)
1 = No external fault

14 reserved

15 reserved
1) The sequence control is the internal
control (software) for realizing the drive
Segment Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 status (r0002)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4160_STW2.vsd Function diagram
- 4160 -
Control word 2 (r0055) 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
 Parameter r0052 CO/BO: Act StatWd1
r0052
Bit No. Meaning r0052
Issue 10/06

1 = Drive ready
Sequence control 1) 0 0 = Drive not ready

1 = Drive ready to run (DC link loaded, pulses disabled)

Sequence control 1)

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
1 0 = Drive not ready to run

1 = Drive running (voltage at output terminals)

Sequence control 1) 2 0 = Pulses disabled
r0052 P0731..P0733
1 = Drive fault active (pulses disabled)
Sequence control 1) 3 1 r0052.03 (x.x)
0 = No fault

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

0 = OFF3 active Signal "Fault active" is inverted by
Sequence control 1) 4 MICROMASTER if connected to
1 = No OFF3
a digital output which means that
the relay will be
0 = OFF3 active
Sequence control 1) 5 in the de-energised state.
1 = No OFF3

1 = ON inhibit active
Sequence control 1) 6 0 = No On inhibit (possible to switch on)

1 = Drive warning active

Alarm processing 7 0 = No warning

0 = Deviation setpoint / act. value

Messages 8 1 = No deviation setpoint / act. Value

Sequence control 1) 9 1 = PZD control (always 1)

1 = Maximum frequency reached

Messages 10 0 = Maximum frequency not reached

0 = Warning: Motor current limit

Messages 11 1 = Motor current limit not reached

Seven-segment display 1 = Motor holding brake active

Braking control 12 0 = Motor holding brake not active
Segment Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
0 = Motor overload
Messages 13 1 = No Motor overload

1 = Motor runs right

Messages 14 0 = Motor does not run right

0 = Inverter overload
Messages 15 1 = No inverter overload
1) The sequence control is the internal
control (software) for realizing the drive
Segment Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 status (r0002)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4170_ZSW1.vsd Function diagram
- 4170 -
Status word 1 (r0052) 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

169
170
Parameter r0053 CO/BO: Act StatWd2
r0053
Bit No. Meaning r0053

1 = DC brake active
Braking control 0
0 = DC brake not active

Alarm processing 1 1 = f_act > P2167 (f_off)

Function Diagrams

Messages 2 1 = f_act >= P1080 (f_min)

Alarm processing 3 1 = Act. current r0027 >= P2170

Messages 4 1 = f_act > P2155 (f_1)

Messages 5 1 = f_act <= P2155 (f_1)

Messages 6 1 = f_act >= setpoint

Messages 7 1 = Act. Vdc r0026 < P2172

Alarm processing 8 1 = Act. Vdc r0026 > P2172

Sequence control 1) 9 1 = Ramping finished

Messages 10 1 = PID output r2294 == P2292 (PID_min)

Messages 11 1 = PID output r2294 == P2291 (PID_max)

Seven-segment display 12 reserved

Segment Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
13 reserved

Sequence control 1) 14 Download data set 0 from AOP

Sequence control 1) 15 Download data set 1 from AOP

1) The sequence control is the internal
control (software) for realizing the drive
Segment Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
status (r0002)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4180_ZSW2.vsd Function diagram
- 4180 -
Status word 2 (r0053) 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
 Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Vdc-max dyn. fact.
10 ... 200 [%]
P1243 (100)

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

Int. time Vdc ctrl
0.1 ... 1000.0 [ms] CO/BO:Stat MotCtrl
P1251 (40.0) 1
r0056
Gain of Vdc ctrl. Diff.time Vdc ctrl r0056.14
0.00 ... 10.00 0.0 ... 1000.0 [ms]
P1250 (1.00) P1252 (1.0)
Vdc controller
0 ... 1 Vdc ctrl outp. lim
P1240 (1) 0 ... 600 [Hz]
P1253 (10)
CO: Act. Vdc [V]
r0026 1
f(VDC)
– 0 FP 6100
0

CO: Vdc-max ON lev [V]

r1242

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology Functions 4600.vsd Function diagram
- 4600 -
Vdc_max Control 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

171
172
BI: Enable JOG ->
P1055
(0:0)
BI: Enable JOG <-
P1056
(0:0)
Function Diagrams

CI: Main setpoint

JOG frequency ->
P1070 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0 1
(755:0) P1058 (5.00)
CI: Main setp scal JOG frequency <-
P1071 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 1 0
(1:0) P1059 (5.00)

+ SUM/ P1082
JOG AFM 0
selection RFG V/f control
+
BI: Disab.add.setp r1078 1
P1074 0 1 CO: Tot. freq.setp [Hz] P1082
DOM

(0:0) r1170
CI: Add. setp.scal CO:Setp. after RFG [Hz]
P1076 0 0
(1:0)
CI: Add. setpoint
P1075
(0:0)
Motor identification

CI:PID trim source

P2254 P2291
(0:0)
PID
CI: PID setpoint controller
P2253
(0:0) P2292

CI: PID feedback r2294

P2264 CO: Act.PID output [%]
(755:0)
BI: Enab. PID ctrl
P2200
(0:0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Overview 5000_Overview.vsd Function diagram
- 5000 -
Setpoint channel and Motor control 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
 PID prop. gain
PID trim gain fact 0.000 ... 65.000
0.00 ... 100.00 P2280 (3.000)
P2256 (100.00) PID integral time
PID setp. ramp-up
CI:PID trim source 0.000 ... 60.000 [s]
0.00 ... 650.00 [s]
P2254 P2257 (1.00) PID setp.filt.Tcon P2285 (0.000)
Issue 10/06

(0:0) 0.00 ... 60.00 [s]

P2261 (0.00) CO/BO: Act StatWd2
CO: PID filt. setp [%]
y r0053
r2262 Kp Tn
CI: PID setpoint r0053 .11

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
P2253 + r0053 .10
x
(0:0)
+ +
-
r2294
PID setp.gain fact
CO: Act.PID output [%]
0.00 ... 100.00
r2260
P2255 (100.00)

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

PID setp. ramp-dwn CO: Act. PID setp. [%] r2273
0.00 ... 650.00 [s]
P2258 (1.00) CO: PID error [%]

PID fdbck max. val

Fdbck.filt. Tconst -200.00 ... 200.00 [%]
0.00 ... 60.00 [s] P2267 (100.00) PID feedback gain PID fdbck fnct sel
P2265 (0.00) 0.00 ... 500.00 0 ... 3
y P2269 (100.00) P2270 (0)
CI: PID feedback
P2264
x
(755:0)
r2266 r2272
CO: PID filt.fdbck [%] CO: PID scal fdbck [%]
PID tranducer type
0 ... 1
PID fdbck min. val
P2271 (0)
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] PID outp.upper lim
P2268 (0.00) -200.00 ... 200.00 [%]
P2291 (100.00)

PID lim. ramp time PID outp.lower lim

0.00 ... 100.00 [s] -200.00 ... 200.00 [%]
P2200 = BI: Enable PID controller
P2293 (1.00) P2292 (0.00)
P2251 = PID mode (0 = PID as setpoint, 1 = PID as trim)

P2350 = PID autotune enable

P2354 = PID tuning timeout length
P2355 = PID tuning offset

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint Channel 5100_PID.vsd Function diagram
- 5100 -
PID Controller 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

173
174
Function Diagrams

Skip frequency 2 Skip frequency 4

0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P1092 (0.00) P1094 (0.00)

Skip frequency 1 Skip frequency 3

0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
Max. frequency
P1091 (0.00) P1093 (0.00)
BI: Inh. neg. setp 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P1110 P1082 (50.00)
(0:0)
JOG fOUT
BI: Reverse
CO: Tot. freq.setp [Hz] P1113
r1078 (722:1) y
1
SUM 0 0 x
SUM/JOG RFG
PID controller selection -1 1 0
1 Bandwidth
No evaluation with PID
CO: Act.PID output [%] r1079 Skip frequency r1119
r2294 CO: Sel. freq.setp [Hz] CO:Setp before RFG [Hz]
fIN
P2200
r1114 Min. frequency
CO:Setp<-dir.ctrl. [Hz] Skipfreq bandwidth 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P1080 (0.00)
0.00 ... 10.00 [Hz]
P1101 (2.00)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel 5200_AFM.vsd Function diagram
- 5200 -
Additional Frequency Modifications (AFM) 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
 Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
CO:Setp. after RFG [Hz]
0 r1170
0
CO:Setp before RFG [Hz] x
1
r1119
0% 1

BI: RFG start Imax controller

P1141
(1:0) (Freeze y)
Stop RFG P1130 P1131 P1132 P1133
BI:RFG enable setp y=0
P1142
Bring RFG to a standstill
(1:0)

BI: RFG enable

P1140
(1:0) 1 = Enable RFG
0 = Set RFG to zero
1
POWER ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint Channel 5300_RFG.vsd Function diagram
- 5300 -
Ramp Function Generator 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

175
176
P1240 P1335 P1338
JOG P1200
Vdmax Slip Resonance
Flying start
controller compensation damping
CO: Tot. freq.setp [Hz] CO: Sel. freq.setp [Hz]
Function Diagrams

r1078 r1079 CO: Act.outp. freq [Hz]

r0024

f(VCD )

e
e
P0F064
SUM 0

vi t c a
+ +

vi t c a
SUM/JOG −
PID AFM RFG
selection
controller 1 + + Frequency output to
CO: Act. frequency [Hz] modulator
CO: Act.PID output [%] r1119 r1170 r0021 n/f(max) +
control reserve
r2294 CO:Setp before RFG [Hz] CO:Setp. after RFG [Hz]

P2200
CO:Imax ctrl Foutp [Hz]
Motor temperatur
Inverter temperatur r1343
i2t inverter
P1340 CO/BO:Stat MotCtrl
Motor ovl fact [%] Imax controller setpoint P1341 r0056
10.0 ... 400.0 [%]
Imax r0056 .13
P0640 (150.0)
r0067 controller
CO:Imax ctrl Voutp [V]
CO: Outp cur limit [A]
Rated mot. current r1344
0.01 ... 10000.00 [A]
P0305 (3.25)

P1350
Voltage
build-up CO: Act.outp. volt [V]
P1300 r0025
V/f characteristic
+ −
FCC
+ + Voltage output to
Voltage boost modulator
P1310 ... P1312

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V/f Control 6100_V_f.vsd Function diagram
- 6100 -
Overview of V/f Control 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Issue 10/06

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
 Display values Analogue outputs
Details refer to 2300
CO: Act. freq setp [Hz]
DAC characteristic **)
Issue 10/06

r0020

CO:Setp before RFG [Hz]

Value x1:DAC scal. Value y2:DAC scal.
r1119
-99999.0 ... 99999.0 [%] 0 ... 20

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
P0777 (0.0) P0780 (20)

.
.
.
Act. rotor speed [1/min]
r0022 CI: DAC
CO: Act. frequency [Hz] P0771 D
x y 12
r0021 (21:0) y = f(x) DAC
A 0 ... 20 mA 13

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

CO: Act.outp. freq [Hz]
r0024

CO: Act.outp. volt [V]

r0025

CO: Act. outp. cur [A]

r0027

CO: Act. Vdc [V]

r0026

**) Reference values

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Control 8000.vsd Function diagram
- 8000 -
Analog outputs and display values 16.08.2006 V1.2 MICROMASTER 420
Function Diagrams

177
Function Diagrams Issue 10/06

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

178 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Faults and Alarms

5 Faults and Alarms

5.1 Fault messages

In the event of a failure, the inverter switches off and a fault code appears on the
display.
NOTE
To reset the fault code, one of three methods listed below can be used:
1. Cycle the power to the drive.
2. Press the button on the BOP or AOP.
3. Via Digital Input 3 (default setting)
Fault messages are stored in parameter r0947 under their code number (e.g. F0003 =
3). The associated error value is found in parameter r0949. The value 0 is entered if a
fault has no error value. It is furthermore possible to read out the point in time that a
fault occurred (r0948) and the number of fault messages (P0952) stored in Parameter
r0947.

F0001 Overcurrent STOP II

Quit
Remove fault and reset fault memory by
- disconnecting the drive converter from the line supply and powering-up again
- Press the Fn key on the BOP or AOP
- Acknowledge fault P2103, P2104
- P0952 (complete fault memory)
Cause
- short-circuit at the output
- ground fault
- excessively large motor (the motor power rating P0307 is greater than the inverter power r0206)
- defective final stage (end stage)
Diagnosis & Remedy
Please check the following:
- are the cable lengths within the limit values ?
- does the motor cable or motor have either a short-circuit or ground fault ?
- do the motor parameters correspond to those of the motor being used ?
- is the motor overloaded or stalled (locked rotor) ?
- increase the accelerating time.
- reduce the gain
- use a motor with a lower power rating
- is the stator resistance value (P0350) correct ?

F0002 Overvoltage STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
- DC link voltage (r0026) higher than the overvoltage threshold (refer to parameter r0026)
- ground fault
Diagnosis & Remedy
Please check the following:
- is the line supply voltage within the permissible range?
- has the DC current DC link monitoring been enabled (P1240) and correctly parameterized?
- extend the deceleration ramp (ramp-down time P1121, P1135)
- remove the ground fault
- is the required braking power within the permissible limits?
NOTE
- a higher moment of inertia requires longer deceleration times; if required, use a braking resistor.
- overvoltage can either be caused by an excessively high line supply voltage or by the fact that the motor
is generating (regenerative mode).
- the motor can be generating as it is decelerating quickly or due to the fact that an active load is driving
the motor.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 179
Faults and Alarms Issue 10/06

F0003 Undervoltage STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
- line voltage failed
- shock stressing outside the permissible limits.
Diagnosis & Remedy
Please check the following:
- is the line supply voltage within the permissible range?
- is the line supply voltage stable with respect to sporadic failures and voltage dips (brown-outs) ?

F0004 Inverter overtemperature STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
- inadequate cooling
- ambient temperature is too high.
ambient temperature is too high.
Diagnosis & Remedy
Please check the following:
- is the pulse frequency P1800 set to the factory setting ? If required reset P1800.
- does the ambient temperature lie within the permissible limits ?
- reduce the load and / or ensure adequate cooling
Please check the following:
- does the fan rotate if the inverter is operational ?

F0005 Inverter I2T STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
- inverter overloaded.
- load duty cycle too high.
- the motor power rating (P0307) is greater than that of the inverter (r0206).
- 100 % overload reached (refer to utilization r0036)
Diagnosis & Remedy
Please check the following:
- does the load duty cycle lie within the permissible limits?
- use a motor with a lower rating (motor power P0307 is greater than ls inverter power r0206)

F0011 Motor overtemperature I2T STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
Motor overloaded
Diagnosis & Remedy
Please check the following:
- is the load cycle correct?
- is the thermal motor time constant (P0611) correct ?
- is the motor I2t alarm threshold correct ?

F0035 Restart after n STOP II

Quit
reset fault memory or Power On / Stop
Cause
- restart fault after n attempts, refer to P1211

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

180 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Faults and Alarms

F0041 Failure, motor data identification STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
Motor data identification run unsuccessful (refer to fault value r0949):
- r0949 = 0: Load missing.
- r0949 = 1: Current limit value reached during identification.
- r0949 = 2: Identified stator resistance less than 0.1% or greater than 100%.
- r0949 = 30: Current controller at voltage limit value
- r0949 = 40: Identified data set inconsistent; at least one identification run unsuccessful
NOTE
Percentage values based on the impedence Zb = Vmot,rated / sqrt(3) / Imot,rated
Diagnosis & Remedy
Please check the following:
- r0949 = 0: Is the motor connected to the inverter ?
- r0949 = 1-40: Is the motor data in P0304-P0311 correct ?
- r0949 = 1-40: Motor circuit configuration correct (star, delta configuration) ?

F0051 Parameter EEPROM fault STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
- read or write operation while saving parameters in the EEPROM was unsuccessful.
Diagnosis & Remedy
- reset to factory setting and then re-parameterize
- if required, change the drive

F0052 Power stack fault STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
- read error, power data or invalid power module data.
Diagnosis & Remedy
- change the drive

F0060 Asic time slice overflow STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
- internal communications failure/error
Diagnosis & Remedy
- if the error still occurs, replace the inverter.
- contact customer service!

F0070 CB setpoint fault STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
no setpoints received via the communications bus during the telegram failure time. Triggered by A0702 /
A0703 / A0704.
Diagnosis & Remedy
- check the communications module (CB) and communications partner.
- check connection to communication partners and ensure valid control word
(see A0702 / A0703 / A0704)

F0071 USS(BOP link) setpoint fault STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
- no setpoint was received via the USS during the telegram off time
Diagnosis & Remedy
- check USS master

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 181
Faults and Alarms Issue 10/06

F0072 USS(COMM link) setpoint fault STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
- no setpoints received via the USS during the telegram off time
Diagnosis & Remedy
- check USS master

F0080 ADC input signal lost STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
- wire breakage
- signal outside the limit values

F0085 External fault STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
- external fault as a result of command input via terminals.
Diagnosis & Remedy
- inhibit terminal input to initiate fault.

F0101 Stack overflow STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
- software error or processor failure
Diagnosis & Remedy
- carry-out self-test routines

F0221 PID feedback below the minimum value STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
- PID feedback below the minimum value P2268.
Diagnosis & Remedy
- change value of P2268.
- set feedback gain.

F0222 PID feedback above maximum value STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
- PID feedback above maximum value P2267.
Diagnosis & Remedy
- change value of P2267.
- set the feedback gain.

F0422 No load applied to inverter STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
No Load is applied to the inverter.
As a result, some functions may not work as under normal load conditions.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

182 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Faults and Alarms

F0450 Failure BIST tests STOP II

Quit
Refer to F0001.
Cause
Self-test routine unsuccessful (refer to fault value r0949):
- r0949 = 1: Self-test routine for power module components unsuccessful
- r0949 = 2: Self-test routine for closed-loop control module components unsuccessful
- r0949 = 4: Several function tests were unsuccessful
- r0949 = 8: Several tests carried-out at the I/O module were unsuccessful (only MICROMASTER 420)
- r0949 = 16: Failure of the internal RAM at the switch-on test
Diagnosis & Remedy
- the drive is functional, but several functions are not correctly executed.
- replace the drive

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 183
Faults and Alarms Issue 10/06

5.2 Alarm Messages

Alarm messages are stored in parameter r2110 under their code number (e.g. A0503
= 503) and can be read out from there.

A0501 Current limit value

Cause
- the motor power rating does not correspond to the inverter power rating
- motor cables are too long
- ground fault
Diagnosis & Remedy
Please check the following:
- does the motor power rating (P0307) match the inverter power rating (r0206) ?
- are the limit values for the cable lengths maintained ?
- does the motor cable or motor have a short-circuit or ground fault ?
- do the motor parameters correspond to those of the motor being used ?
- stator resistance value (P0350) correct ?
- is the motor overloaded or is the rotor locked (cannot rotate) ?
- ramp-up time P1120 too low ?

A0502 Overvoltage limit value

Cause
- the overvoltage limit value has been reached (actual value of the DC link voltage r0026 greater than
r1242).
Diagnosis & Remedy
- if this alarm is permanently displayed, check the inverter input voltage.
- is the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller) de-activated (refer to parameter P1240) ?
- short ramp times and/or large flywheel masses (moment of inertia) ?

A0503 Undervoltage limit value

Cause
- line supply has failed.
- line voltage and therefore also the DC link voltage (r0026) below the defined limit value (refer to
parameter r0026).
Diagnosis & Remedy
- check the line voltage.

A0504 Inverter overtemperature

Cause
- alarm threshold of the inverter heatsink temperature (P0614) was exceeded; this results in a reduction
of the pulse frequency and/or the output frequency (dependent on the parameterization in (P0610).
Diagnosis & Remedy
Please check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the permissible limits ?
- are the load and load duty cycle within the permissible limits ?

A0505 Inverter I2T

Cause
- overload alarm limit P0294 is exceeded (refer to utilization r0036)
- the pulse frequency and/or the output frequency is reduced as a function of the setting of parameter
P0290.
Diagnosis & Remedy
- check whether the load duty cycle lies within the permissible limits.

A0511 Motor overtemperature I2T

Cause
- motor is overloaded.
- load duty cycle is exceeded.
Diagnosis & Remedy
Please check the following:
- value P0611 (motor I2t time constant) suitable?
- is P0614 (motor I2t overload alarm) set to a suitable value?

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

184 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Faults and Alarms

A0541 Motor data identification routine active

Cause
- motor data identification routine (P1910) selected and is active

A0571 Auto restart after fault present

A0600 RTOS data loss alarm

Cause
- time slice overflow was identified
Diagnosis & Remedy
- use lower baud rate for USS
- de-activate inverter functions

A0700 CB alarm 1
Cause
- The parameter or configuring settings by the PROFIBUS master are invalid.
Diagnosis & Remedy
- Correct the PROFIBUS configuration.

A0701 CB alarm 2
Cause
- CB-(communications module)-specific
Diagnosis & Remedy
- refer to the CB User Manual

A0702 CB alarm 3
Cause
- The link to the PROFIBUS is interrupted.
Diagnosis & Remedy
- Check connector, cable and PROFIBUS master.

A0703 CB alarm 4
Cause
- No setpoints, or invalid setpoints (control word = 0) are being received from the PROFIBUS master
Diagnosis & Remedy
- Check setpoints from the PROFIBUS master. Switch SIMATIC CPU to "RUN".

A0704 CB alarm 5
Cause
- At least one configured internode transmitter is not yet active, or has failed.
Diagnosis & Remedy
- Activate internode transmitter.

A0705 CB alarm 6
Cause
- No actual values received from inverter.
Diagnosis & Remedy
- fault is in inverter.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 185
Faults and Alarms Issue 10/06

A0706 CB alarm 7
Cause
- PROFIBUS-DP communication board: Software error.
Diagnosis & Remedy
- fault on the PROFIBUS-DP communication board, for details see diagnostic parameter.

A0707 CB alarm 8
Cause
- CB-(Communications module)-specific
Diagnosis & Remedy
- refer to the CB User Manual

A0708 CB alarm 9
Cause
- CB-(Communications module)-specific
Diagnosis & Remedy
- refer to the CB User Manual

A0709 CB alarm 10
Cause
- CB-(Communications module)-specific
Diagnosis & Remedy
- refer to the CB User Manual

A0710 CB communications error

Cause
- loss of communications with the CB (communications module).
Diagnosis & Remedy
- check the CB hardware.

A0711 CB communications error

Cause
- CB (communications module) signals a communications error.
Diagnosis & Remedy
- check the CB parameters

A0910 Vdc-max controller disabled/switched-out

Cause
- Vdc max controller was de-activated, as it was not able to keep the DC link voltage (r0026) within the
limit values (refer to r0026 and P1240).
This occurs,
- if the line supply voltage is permanently too high.
- if the motor is driven by an active load, which means that the motor goes into regenerative operation.
- while decelerating (short down-ramps P1121) for extremely high load torques
Diagnosis & Remedy
Please check the following:
- is the input voltage (P0756) within the permissible range ?
- are load duty cycle and load limits within the permissible limits ?

A0911 Vdc-max controller active

Cause
- Vdc max controller is active
- the ramp-down times are automatically increased in order to keep the DC link voltage (r0026) within the
limit values (refer to r0026 and P1240).

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

186 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Faults and Alarms

A0912 Vdc-min controller active

Cause
- Vdc min controller is activated, if the DC link voltage (r0026) falls below the minimum value (refer to
r0026 or P1240).
- the kinetic energy of the motor is used to buffer the DC link voltage and therefore to slow down the
drive.
- therefore brief line failures no longer automatically result in an undervoltage trip.

A0920 ADC parameters not correctly set

Cause
ADC parameters should not be set to identical values, as this would lead to illogical results.
- Index 0: Parameter settings for output identical.
- Index 1: Parameter settings for input identical.
- Index 2: Parameter settings for input do not correspond to ADC type.

A0921 DAC parameters not set properly.

Cause
- DAC parameters (P0777 and P0779) have identical values.
OR
- DAC parameters (P0778 and P0780) have identical values.
Identical values would produce illogical results.
Diagnosis & Remedy
Check the following:
- Output parameter settings. Ensure P0777 and P0779 are not identical.
- Input parameter settings. Ensure P0778 and P0780 are not identical.

A0922 No load at the inverter

Cause
- no load is connected to the inverter.
- therefore several functions can run differently than under normal load conditions.

A0923 JOG counter-clockwise as well as JOG clockwise are requested

Cause
- both JOG clockwise and JOG counter-clockwise (P1055/P1056) have been requested. This is the
reason that the RFG output frequency has been frozen to the actual value.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 187
Faults and Alarms Issue 10/06

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

188 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Abbreviations

6 Abbreviations
AC Alternating current
AD Analog digital converter
ADC Analog digital converter
ADR Address
AFM Additional frequency modification
AIN Analog input
AOP Advanced operator panel
AOUT Analog output
ASP Analog setpoint
ASVM Asymmetric space vector modulation
BCC Block check character
BCD Binary-coded decimal code
BI Binector input
BICO Binector / connector
BO Binector output
BOP Basic operator panel
C Commissioning
CB Communication board
CCW Counter-clockwise
CDS Command data set
CFM Cubic feet per minute (1 l/s ≅ 2,1 CFM)
CI Connector input
CM Configuration management
CMD Commando
CMM Combimaster
CO Connector output
CO/BO Connector output / Binector output
COM Common (terminal that is connected to NO or NC)
COM-Link Communication link
CT Commissining, ready to run
CT Constant torque
CUT Commissining, run, ready to run
CW Clockwise
DA Digital analog converter
DAC Digital analog converter
DC Direct current
DDS Drive data set
DIN Digital input
DIP DIP switch
DOUT Digital output
DS Drive state
EEC European Economic Community
EEPROM Electrical erasable programmable read-only
ELCB Earth leakage circuit breaker
EMC Electro-magnetic compatibility

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 189
Abbreviations Issue 10/06

EMF Electromotive force

EMI Electro-magnetic interference
FAQ Frequently asked questions
FCC Flux current control
FCL Fast current limit
FF Fixed frequency
FFB Free function block
FOC Field orientated control
FSA Frame size A
GSG Getting started guide
GUI ID Global unique identifier
HIW Main actual value
HSW Main setpoint
HTL High-threshold logic
HVAC heating, ventilation, air conditioning
I/O Input and output
IBN Commissioning
IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor
IND Sub-index
JOG Jog
KIB Kinetic buffering
LCD Liguid crystal display
LED Light emitting diode
LGE Length
MHB Motor holding brake
MM4 MICROMASTER 4th. Generation
MOP Motor potentiometer
NC Normally closed
NO Normally open
OPI Operating instructions
PDS Power drive system
PID PID controller (proportional, integral, derivative)
PKE Parameter ID
PKW Parameter ID value
PLC Programmable logic controller
PLI Parameter list
PPO Parameter process data object
PTC Positive temperature coefficient
PWE Parameter value
PWM Pulse-width modulation
PX Power extension
PZD Process data
QC Quick commissioning
RAM Random-access memory
RCCB Residual current circuit breaker
RCD Residual current device
RFG Ramp function generator
RFI Radio-frequency interference
RPM Revolutions per minute

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

190 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Abbreviations

SCL Scaling
SDP Status display panel
SLVC Sensorless vector control
STW Control word
STX Start of text
SVM Space vector modulation
TTL Transistor-transistor logic
USS Universal serial interface
VC Vector control
VT Variable torque
ZSW Status word

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 191
Abbreviations Issue 10/06

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

192 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Suggestions and/or Corrections

To Suggestions
Corrections
Siemens AG
For Publication/Manual:
Automation & Drives Group MICROMASTER 420
SD SPA PM4 Parameter List
P.O. Box 3269

D-91050 Erlangen
Federal Republic of Germany

Email:
documentation.sd@siemens.com User Documentation
From
Name: Order number: 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
Date of Issue: 10/06
Company/Service Department Should you come across any printing
Address: errors when reading this publication,
please notify us on this sheet.
Phone: __________ /
Suggestions for improvement are also
Fax: ________ /
welcome.

MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List

6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 193
 MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
194 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Parameter List
6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0 195
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives Group (A&D)
Standard Drives (SD) Division
Postfach 3269, D-91050 Erlangen © Siemens AG, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2006
Federal Republic of Germany Subject to change without prior notice

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order No.: 6SE6400-5BA00-0BP0